2003 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii
Important Handling Information .............................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance...............................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................63
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................127
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................183
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................197
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................233
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................297
Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................307
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................339
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................353
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................357
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle, and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the CR-V. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en f rançais, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33S9AC10
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda CR-V was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Headings
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Main Menu
Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident.
226
198
Off-Highway Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iii
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
2
POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
(P.88)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.114)
INDICATORS
GAUGES
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.138, 154)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.144, 162)
PARKING BRAKE
(P.82)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.128)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.186)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
(P.185)
A/T model is shown.
(P.94)
HATCH GLASS RELEASE
BUTTON
(P.110)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.72)
(P.65)
Main Menu
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.76, 77)
MOONROOF
(P.113)
CRUISE CONTROL
(P.179)
A/T model is shown.
(P.83)
TILT ADJUSTMENT
HORN
(P.82)
PARKING BRAKE
(P.81)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.78, 79)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.81)
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
(P.204)
SHIFT LEVER (A/T)
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.........................................Airbags . 10
..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
..................................Door Locks . 11
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
............................Protecting Adults . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 17
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 20
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 20
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 22
........................Protecting Children . 24
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 24
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 25
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to
..............................Children . 25
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 28
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 28
...Additional Safety Precautions . 28
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 29
.......................Protecting Infants . 34
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.......Protecting Larger Children . 42
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 47
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 50
..Seat Belt System Components . 50
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 52
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 53
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 54
........................SRS Components . 54
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 54
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 57
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 58
.............................Airbag Service . 59
...Additional Safety Precautions . 59
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60
...................................Safety Labels . 61
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your vehicle is
equipped with airbags, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear your seat belts, and wear them
properly. (See page .)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
17
238
24
10
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
7
(5)
(7)
(10)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(9)
(8)
(6)
(2)
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(U.S. EX, Canadian EX and EX-L)
(9) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(10) Door Locks
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your vehicle is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
8
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
What you should do:
9
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s seats are designed to
keep you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the
vehicle is moving.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the vehicle during a crash. It also
helps prevent occupants from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out, and outsiders from
unexpectedly opening your doors.
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthevehicle,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Head Restraints
Door LocksSeats and Seat-Backs
What you should do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your vehicle’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
inthebackseat(seepage ).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
Alldoorsandthetailgateare
closed and locked (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
17
24
13
15
16
13
193
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and
tailgate (including the hatch glass)
are closed.
Your vehicle has a door
monitor light on the
instrument panel to indicate when
any door is not tightly closed.
Your vehicle also has a
tailgate and hatch glass
open indicator light on the
instrument panel to indicate when
the tailgate or the hatch glass is not
tightly closed.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the vehicle is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the vehicle during a crash.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel, or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
42
88
CONTINUED
Introduction
Close and Lock the Doors
Adjust the Front Seats
1.
2.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel.Alsomakesureyourfront
seat passenger moves the seat as far
to the rear as possible.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
movetheseatawayfromthe
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
97
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
97
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
99
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
16
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
In the rear center seating position,
be sure the detachable anchor is
latched securely (see page ).108
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
To adjust the height of a front seat
belt anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
18
RELEASE BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
50
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the vehicle,
or by being struck by an inflating
front airbag. Being struck by an
inflating side airbag can result in
possibly serious injuries.
83
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6. 7.
20
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your vehicle’s
airbags and other safety features,
you must sit properly and wear your
seat belt properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Advice for Pregnant Women
21
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All passengers
must sit in locked, upright seats
andbeproperlyrestrainedbyseat
belts.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp objects in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbag inflates.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
On models with side airbags, do
not attach hard objects on or near
a f ront door.
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers. (See page
.)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
(See page .)
29
42
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
24
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your vehicle crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
CONTINUED
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, in a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
42
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag can
be hazardous.
Small Children Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inf lating passenger’s
front airbag.
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
U.S. Models Canadian Models
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Your vehicle has three seating
positions in the back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
three children in your vehicle:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
Using
this feature will prevent children
from playing with the windows,
which could expose them to
hazards or distract the driver (see
page ).
Using this feature will
prevent children from opening the
doors and accidentally falling out
(see page ).
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
42
13
20
17
93
110
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Use the main power window
switch to prevent children from
opening the rear windows.
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
vehicle. Teach your children not to
play in or around vehicles.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the tailgate or hatch
glass, which can lead to accidental
injury or death.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.34
38
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants: Small Children:
2.
1.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
30
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
andbeproperlyinstalledinall
recommended seating positions in
your vehicle.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Your vehicle has lower anchors
installed for use with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) - compatible child seats.
For more information, see page .48
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forward-
facing child seats in your vehicle.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a
forward-facing child seat with the
seat belt (see page ).
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a
forward-facing child seat (see
page ).
39
35
39
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants:
Small children:
Back Seats
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the vehicle during
a crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt. Some child seats
can be secured to the vehicle’s
LATCH anchorage system instead.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
, and for instructions on
howtoproperlysecurechildseats
in this vehicle.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
483935
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
In this vehicle, a rear-facing child
seatcanbeplacedinanyseating
position in the back, but not in the
front seat.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or seriously injure an
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant is at least one year
old, reaches the seat maker’s weight
or height limit, and is able to sit up
without support.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
If you have a child seat designed to
be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
Before installing a child seat in the
center seating position of the rear
seat, make sure the seat belt
detachable anchor is securely
latched (see page ).
13
15
1.
2.
48
108
CONTINUED
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
3.
4.
5. 6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
In this vehicle, the best place to
install a forward-facing child seat is
in one of the seating positions in the
back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
A child at least one year old who can
sit up without support, and who fits
within the child seat maker’s weight
and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
38
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
If you have a child seat designed to
be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and
that the child is properly strapped in
the seat.
Before installing a child seat in the
center seating position of the rear
seat, make sure the seat belt
detachable anchor is securely
latched (see page ).
48
2.
1.
108
CONTINUED
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Child Seat Installation
39
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
3.
4.
5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat on a
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.
We recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
sit in the rear seat, all the way back
against the seat and have them put
on the seat belt. Follow the
instructions on page . Then check
how the belt fits.
17
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
42
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible,
uses a booster seat if needed,
and wears the seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a high or low-
back style that allows the child to be
directly secured with the lap/
shoulder belt.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, and if
the lap belt rests over the child’s
hipbones and touches the tops of
their thighs as shown, the child is
probably big enough to wear the seat
belt.
However, if the shoulder belt
touchesorcrossesthechild’sneck,
or if the lap belt crosses the child’s
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
This could result in serious neck and
internal injuries during a crash.
CONTINUED
Using a Booster SeatDo not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck or over the stomach.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
A child should continue using a
booster seat until they exceed the
booster seat manufacturer’s
requirements.
Even then, they may still need to use
a booster seat. Note that some states
now require children to use boosters
until they reach a certain age and/or
weight.Besuretocheckcurrent
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
17 42
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has three tether
anchorage points on the ceiling near
the tailgate opening for securing a
tether-style child seat to the vehicle.
Remove the head restraint where
you want to place the child seat.
You can remove the head restraint in
each outside position by pressing the
release button. The head restraint in
the center position can be removed
by pulling it up (see page ).
The tether anchorage points are
located under plastic covers. Select
the anchorage point you want to use,
and remove the cover with a small
flat-tipped screwdriver or fingernail
file.Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
99
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
COVER TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the removed head
restraints are secured in the cargo
area. Reinstall the head restraints
when the child seat is removed.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point as shown in
the illustration, then tighten the
strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the outer
rear seats. The lower anchors are
located between the seat-back and
seat bottom and are to be used only
with a child seat designed for use
with LATCH.
The exact location of each lower
anchor is marked with a small circle
above the lower anchor point.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
Using LATCH
47
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
TETHER STRAP HOOK
LOWER ANCHORS
MARKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Store the seat belt buckle in the
pocket in the seat cushion and
move the center seat belt away
from the lower anchors.
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Put the child seat in the rear left
or right vehicle seat and attach the
child seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
1.
2.
4.3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
48
Rigid type
Flexible type
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the head restraint (see
page ).
Make sure the removed head
restraints are secured in the cargo
area. Reinstall the head restraints
when the child seat is removed.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point, and
tighten the strap according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
This symbol on rear or forward
facing child seats or booster
cushions indicates the presence of
LATCH compatible hardware.
5. 6.
7.
99
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lower Universal Anchorage
System Symbol
49
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable anchor
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.
The detachable anchor should
normaly be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable anchor (see page ).
35
39
17
108
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).57
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
302
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
U.S. Models
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags and activate the
automatic seat belt tensioners.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
52
57
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
54
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
Standard on EX model in the U.S., and
EX and EX-L models in Canada
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Side Airbags Work
56
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
The SRS indicator light
alerts you to a potential
problem with your front airbags and
automatic seat belt tensioners.
On models with side airbags, this
light will also alert you to a potential
problem with your side airbags or
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (see page ).
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
58
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
It does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
thesideairbagcutoffsystemhas
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the indicator should light
briefly and go out (see page ). If it
doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in
the front seat, have the system
checked.
67
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works
58
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners, and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Your front and side airbag systems
(if equipped) are virtually
maintenance-free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Take your vehicle to
an authorized Honda dealer as
soon as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
192
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting a
Honda dealer.
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the under-
side.
With the tailgate/hatch glass open,
air flow can pull exhaust gas into
your vehicle’s interior and create a
hazardous condition. If you must
drive with the tailgate/hatch glass
open, open all the windows and set
the heating and cooling system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
Select the Fresh Air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
60
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Honda dealer
for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
61
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On models without side airbags
On models with side airbags
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
62
HOOD
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 64
...............................Indicator Lights . 65
.............................................Gauges . 72
...............................Speedometer . 72
.................................Tachometer . 72
..............Odometer/Trip Meter . 73
Outside Temperature
..................................Indicator . 73
..................................Fuel Gauge . 74
...................Temperature Gauge . 74
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 75
...................................Headlights . 76
............Daytime Running Lights . 77
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 77
................................Turn Signals . 77
.....................Windshield Wipers . 78
..................Windshield Washers . 79
Rear Window Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 80
..........................Hazard Warning . 81
.............Rear Window Defogger . 81
.............................Parking Brake . 82
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 83
...............................Keys and Locks . 84
..............................................Keys . 84
....................Immobilizer System . 85
............................Ignition Switch . 86
......................Power Door Locks . 88
...................Remote Transmitter . 89
..............Childproof Door Locks . 93
........................................Tailgate . 93
....................................Glove Box . 96
.................................................Seats . 97
.............Front Seat Adjustments . 97
Driver’s Seat Height
..............................Adjustment . 98
...................FrontSeatArmrests .98
..........................Head Restraints . 99
............Rear Seat Adjustments . 100
....................Rear Seat Armrest . 101
........Reclining the Front Seats . 102
.............Folding the Rear Seats . 104
...................Detachable Anchor . 108
..................................Seat Heaters . 109
............................Power Windows . 110
.......................................Moonroof . 113
...........................................Mirrors . 114
..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 114
..................................Center Table . 115
.........................Beverage Holders . 116
.................................Built-in Table . 117
...............................Center Pocket . 119
...................................Storage Box . 119
.............................Driver’s Pocket . 120
.......................................Coin Tray . 120
........................Sunglasses Holder . 121
............Accessory Power Sockets . 122
........................Dashboard Pocket . 123
...............................Interior Lights . 124
..............................Ceiling Light . 124
...................................Spotlights . 124
......................Cargo Area Light . 125
................Ignition Switch Light . 125
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
Control Locations
Instruments and Controls
64
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
(P.88)
(P.110)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.186)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.94)
HATCH GLASS
RELEASE BUTTON
A/T model is shown.
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
(P.185) (P.128)
HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS
(P.82)
PARKING BRAKE
(P.144, 162)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.138, 154)
AUDIO SYSTEMMIRROR CONTROLS
(P.114)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
65
(P.68)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.66, 325)
(P.68)
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP
(P.66, 326)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.327)
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED INDICATOR
(P.70) (P.67)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER LIGHT
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
(P.69)
DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR
(P.70) (P.66)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.69)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
(P.67)
(P.69)
(P.70)
TAILGATE AND HATCH GLASS OPEN INDICATOR
(P.67)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page .
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
This light has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
2.
1.
329
327
325
326
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
66
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags or automatic seat
belt tensioners. On models equipped
with side airbags, this light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your side airbags or passenger’s side
airbag automatic cutoff system. For
complete information, see page .
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
58
57
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Light
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only on models equipped with ABS (see
page )212
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the light on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For complete
information, see page .
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signaling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the vehicle should flash.
214
85 288
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
68
U.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only Canadian models only
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
77
76
258
179
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
This light comes on if the tailgate or
the hatch glass is not closed tightly.
This light comes on if any door is not
closed tightly.
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages .
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
238 242
Indicator Lights
Maintenance Required
Indicator
Tailgate and Hatch Glass
Open Indicator
Door-open Indicator
Instruments and Controls
70
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
Hold the button until the indicator
resets (approximately ten
seconds).
Press and hold the Select/Reset
button on the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
1.
2.
3.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
U.S. models
Canadian models
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
72
ODOMETER/TRIP METER
SELECT/RESET BUTTON
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your vehicle has been driven.
It measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
The trip meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Switch between these displays
and the odometer by pressing the
Select/Reset button repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Centigrade.
Canadian models only
Instruments and Controls
Gauges
Odometer/Trip Meter
Outside Temperature Indicator
73
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper white zone. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
The temperature sensor is located in
the front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road sur-
face, engine heat, and the exhaust
from the surrounding traffic. This
can cause the temperature reading
not to be correct when your speed is
under 19 mph (30 km/h).
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the vehicle
is on level ground. It may show
slightly more or less than the actual
amount when you are driving on
curvy or hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
When the outside temperature goes
down below 37°F (3°C) the first
time, the temperature reading blinks
about ten times to show you the
outside temperature is low. In certain
weather conditions, temperature
readings near freezing 32°F (0°C)
couldmeanthaticeisformingonthe
road surface.
323
Temperature GaugeFuel Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
74
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
The hazard warning lights switch is
on the dashboard between the
center air vents.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
The controls under the left air vent
are for the moonroof and the cruise
control.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
75
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS SHIFT LEVER (A/T)
(P.204)
(P.76, 77)
CRUISE CONTROL
(P.179)
MOONROOF
(P.113)
TILT ADJUSTMENT
(P.83)
(P.82)
PARKING BRAKE
HORN
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.81)
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
(P.81)
(P.78, 79)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
A/T model is shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change from low beams to high
beams, push the turn signal lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will light
(see page ). To return to low
beams, pull the turn signal lever
back.
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder tone when you open the
driver’s door.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off. The high beams will
stay on for as long as you hold the
lever back, no matter what position
the headlight switch is in.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate light.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
69
Headlights
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Turntheknobontheleftsideofthe
instrument panel to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights.
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
CONTINUED
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights Turn Signals
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
77
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
This lever controls the windshield
wipers and washers. It has five
positions:
MIST: mist
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever
up or down.
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. In low speed and
high speed, the wipers run continu-
ously.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Wipers
78
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever up from the
OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
This gives you a quick way to clear
the windshield.
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever.
The wipers run at low speed while
you’re pulling the lever, then
complete one more sweep of the
windshield after you release it.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washers
79
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Therotatingswitchontheright
lever controls the rear window wiper
and washer.
To activate the rear windshield wiper,
rotate the switch to ‘‘ON’’. The wiper
operates every seven seconds after
completing two sweeps. When you
turn the wiper switch to the ‘‘OFF’’
position or turn off the ignition
switch, the wiper will return to its
parked position.
To use the wiper and washer, rotate
and hold the switch one position up
from ‘‘ON’’. The wiper opreates
while you are holding the switch,
then completes two more sweeps
after you release it. To use the
washer only, rotate and hold the
switch one position down from
‘‘OFF’’.
The rear wiper will not work if the
hatch glass is not fully closed.
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
If you open the hatch glass while the
rear wiper is operating, the wiper will
stop immediately. To store it, rotate
the wiper switch to the ‘‘OFF’’
position and close the hatch glass,
then turn the wiper switch on and off
again with the ignition switch on.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
Instruments and Controls
80
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the button between the center
air vents to turn on the hazard
warning lights (four-way flashers).
This causes all four outside turn
signals and both indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light in the
button lights to show the defogger is
on.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To release the parking brake, push
andholdthereleasebuttononthe
side of the parking brake lever, pull
the lever toward you slightly, then
push the lever forward.
The parking brake light on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page ).
To apply the parking brake, firmly
pull the parking brake lever toward
you.
66
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Parking Brake
82
PARKING BRAKE
LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
1.
2.
3.
4.
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
20
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel Adjustment
83
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immedi-
ately with a soft cloth.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Your vehicle comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle:
• Ignition
• Doors
•GloveBox
• Tailgate
The valet key works only in the
ignition, the door locks and the
tailgate. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle
and the valet key at a parking facility.
When replacing keys, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your set of keys.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Keep the tag stored in a safe place.
Keys
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
84
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
MASTER
KEYS
(Black)
KEY NUMBER
TAG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some models also come with two
remote transmitters; see page for
an explanation of their operation.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled. Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
vehicle’s key and the ignition
switch while trying to start the
engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
89
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Immobilizer System indicator
will also blink several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Ignition Switch
86
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− −
−
−
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must also be in Park. The
anti-theft lock will lock the steering
column when you remove the key.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the vehicle are
usable. Several of the lights on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY to ON.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
85
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
LOCK (0) START (III)
ON (II)
ACCESSORY (I)
87
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out the vehicle, push the lock
tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove the key
from the ignition switch, pull the
outside door handle and push the
locktabdownorpushthemaster
switch down. Release the handle,
then close the door.
Each door has a lock tab at the top of
the door. When you push down the
lock tab on the driver’s door, all
doors and the tailgate lock. Pulling
up the lock tab on the driver’s door
unlocks only that door. The lock tab
on each passenger’s door only locks
and unlocks that door.
The front doors can be locked and
unlocked from the outside with the
key.
The master door lock switch on the
driver’s door locks and unlocks all of
the doors and tailgate. Push the
switch down to lock all of the doors
and the tailgate, and up to unlock
them.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Power Door Locks
88
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
When you push the LOCK button a
second time within 5 seconds, the
horn will sound once to verify that
thedoorsandthetailgatearelocked.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you push the button a
second time. The front turn signals,
parking lights, side marker lights,
taillights, license plate light, and the
instrument panel lights flash twice
each time you push the button.
All doors and the tailgate lock when
youpushdownthelocktabonthe
driver’s door, or lock the driver’s
door from the outside with the key.
Only the driver’s door unlocks when
you use the key or the lock tab. To
unlock the passenger’s doors, use
the master door lock switch or the
locktaboneachdoor.
You can lock and unlock your vehicle
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, all doors
and the tailgate lock. The front turn
signals, parking lights, side marker
lights, taillights, license plate light,
and the instrument panel lights flash
once.
On EX model in the U.S., and EX and
EX-L models in Canada
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Remote Transmitter
89
LOCK
BUTTON
HATCH
GLASS
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ceiling light (if the light switch
is in the center position) will come
on when you press the UNLOCK
button. If you do not open any of the
doors or the tailgate, the light will
fade out in about 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock. If you relock the doors and
the tailgate with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
You cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
if any door or the tailgate is not fully
closed. You cannot lock or unlock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
key in the ignition switch.
To open the hatch glass, push the
Hatch Glass Release button for
about two seconds. The hatch glass
willnotopenifthekeyisinthe
ignition switch.
Even if the hatch glass is opened, the
tailgate can be locked with the
remote transmitter. Make sure to
check the hatch glass manually.
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your vehicle’s horn and
lights to attract attention. When
activated, the horn will sound, and
the headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights will flash for
about 30 seconds. To activate panic
mode,pressandholdthePANIC
button for about one second.
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Panic Mode
90
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
▽
◎
CONTINUED
Battery type: CR2025
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and tailgate,
and the LED will not light. Replace
the battery as soon as possible.
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the trans-
mitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same ( side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
Align the mark on the cover
with the mark on the
transmitter, then set the cover in
place and turn it clockwise.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Replacing the Battery
91
Open
Close
BATTERY ROUND
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your vehicle’s
system by your Honda dealer. Any
other transmitters you have will also
need to be reprogrammed.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Transmitter Care
92
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the Lock position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up and use the outside door
handle.
You can lock or unlock the tailgate in
any of these ways:
Useyourmasterorvaletkeyto
lock and unlock the tailgate.
Turnthekeyclockwisetolockthe
tailgate, and counterclockwise to
unlock it.
Lockthetailgatebypushingdown
the lock tab on the driver’s door
(see page ), or by using the
master or valet key in the driver’s
door lock.
You can also lock and unlock the
tailgate with the remote
transmitter (see page ).
Lock or unlock the tailgate with
the master door lock switch.
88
89
CONTINUED
On EX model in the U.S., and EX and
EX-L models in Canada
Childproof Door Locks Tailgate
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
93
LEVER
Lock
Unlock
Position
Lock Position
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can unlock the hatch glass in
any of these ways:
Press the hatch glass release
buttononthedriver’sdoor.
With the tailgate unlocked, open the
tailgate by pulling the handle.
To keep the tailgate door open on an
incline, use the stop from the tool kit.
The tool kit is in the storage bin
under the cargo floor. Put the stop
on the support strut as shown.
Make sure to remove the stop before
closing the tailgate.
Opening the Hatch Glass
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
94
HANDLE
STOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenthehatchglassto
access the cargo area with the
tailgate closed. Make sure the
tailgate and the hatch glass are
closed and locked securely before
driving.
The rear wiper will not operate with
the hatch glass open. If you open the
hatch glass while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will stop (see
page ).
See page for information on
cargo loading. Keep the tailgate and
the hatch glass closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and the hatch glass, and to
prevent exhaust gas from getting
into the interior. See
on page .Press and hold the hatch glass
release button on the remote
transmitter for about two seconds
(see page ).
Use the master or valet key in the
tailgate lock. Turn the key
clockwise as far as it will go.
The hatch glass will pop up slightly.
To open the hatch glass, lift it up
fully.
Make sure the rear wiper switch is
off and the wiper is in its parked
position before opening the hatch
glass.
To close the hatch glass, lower it,
then press on the handle until it
latches.
90
80
193
60
On EX model in the U.S., and EX and
EX-L models in Canada
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
95
HATCH GLASS OPEN POSITION
HATCH GLASS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
The glove box light comes on only
when the instrument panel lights are
on.
Glove Box
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
96
Lock
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 15
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull up on the lever on the outside of
the seat bottom. Move the seat-back
to the desired position and release
the lever. Let the seat-back latch into
the new position.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To adjust the height of the driver’s
seat, turn the dial on the outside of
theseatbottom. Eachfrontseathasanarmreston
thesideoftheseat-back.Touseit,
pivotitdown.
Only on vehicles with an automatic
transmission
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Front Seat Armrests
Instruments and Controls
Seats
98
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
16
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests
against the center of the restraint. A
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
The head restraints in the front and
rear outboard seating positions
adjust for height. You need both
hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
sideways and push the restraint
down.
To remove a front head restraint or a
head restraint in one of the rear
outboard seating positions for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
To remove the rear center head
restraint, pull it up and out of the
seat-back.
Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
99
REAR CENTER
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 15
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The seat position and seat-back
angle of the left and right sides of
the rear seat can be adjusted
separately.
To adjust the rear seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull up on the release lever on the
outside of the seat-back. Move the
seat-back to the desired position,
then release the lever. Make sure
the seat-back latches in the new
position.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Rear Seat Adjustments
100
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When using the center seating
position, adjust the left and right side
of the rear seats to the same position.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
backs after you adjust the rear seats.
The rear seat armrest is located in
the center of the rear seat. Pivot it
down to use it.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Rear Seat Armrest
101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the rear seats as far back
as they will go.
Remove the head restraints from
the front seats (see page ).
Store the head restraints in the
front seat-back pockets.
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats to a fully flat position so
they are level with the rear seat
cushions, making a large cushioned
area.Todothis:
2.1.
99
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Reclining the Front Seats
102
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Adjust the front seats forward as
far as they will go. Pull up the seat-
back angle adjustment lever and
pivot the seat-back backward.
Release the lever when the seat-
back is level with the rear seat
cushion.
Move the front seat backward
until it touches the rear seat.
Adjust the rear seat-back to the
desired position.
4.3. 5.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
103
SLIDE BAR
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reverse this procedure to return the
front and rear seats to the upright
position. Make sure you install the
head restraints and the seats are
locked securely before driving.
When you return the seat-back to
the upright position, hold the seat-
back to keep it from going up too
quickly.
The rear seat-back can be folded
down to give more cargo room. Each
side folds down separately. With only
half the seat folded, you can still
carry a passenger in the rear seat.
You can also fold up each of the rear
seats separately to create further
cargo space (see page ).
Push the seat belt buckles into the
seat cushion.
1.
106
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Folding the Rear Seats
104
BUCKLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
When you are folding the right half
of the rear seat, use the latch plate to
release the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it.
Lower the head restraint to its
lowest position.
Pull up on the release lever on the
outside of the seat-back.
Fold the seat-back forward.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat-back to the upright position.
Tug on the seat-back to make sure it
is latched. Position the seat belt in
front of the seat-back. Make sure the
seat is locked securely before driving.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
3.
2.
4.
108
Seats
Instruments and Controls
105
LATCH PLATE
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To fold up the rear seat:
Followsteps1through4onpages
and for folding down the
seat-back.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release strap
under the seat cushion’s back
edge, then lift the rear of the seat.
You cannot fold up the rear seat if
it is not latched securely in the
rearmost position.
Pivot the seat forward.
Pull out the fastening strap from
the slit on the seat-back. Move the
front seat forward slightly, then
attach the anchor on the fastening
strap to the hook on the bottom of
the front seat. Adjust the front
seat to the desired position.
Pull up the bar under the seat
cushion and slide the rear seat
backward.
Therearseatwillnotfoldupifitis
not back as far as it will go.
104
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
105
Seats
Instruments and Controls
106
SLIDE BAR
LOCK RELEASE
STRAP
FASTENING
STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tightenthestraptoremoveany
slack and make sure the seat is
secure.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
When you are not using the
fastening strap, roll up the strap and
store it properly into the slit on the
seat-back.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
backs.
In the center seating position of the
rear seat, be sure the detachable
anchor is latched securely before
using the seat belt (see page ).
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See
on page .
108
193
6.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Carrying Cargo
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the right side of the
rear seat is folded.
To unlatch the detachable anchor
before folding the seat-back, insert
the latch plate into the slot on the
side of the anchor buckle and allow
the seat belt to retract. Store the
detachable anchor and seat belt latch
plates in the retractor housing.
When the seat-back is returned to its
upright position, be sure to latch the
detachable anchor by lining up the
triangle marks on the small latch
plate and anchor buckle, then insert
the plate into the buckle. Tug on the
seat belt to verify that the detachable
anchor is securely latched. Make
sure the seat belt is not twisted.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Detachable Anchor
108
ANCHOR BUCKLE
LATCH PLATE
SMALL LATCH
PLATE
TRIANGLE
MARKS
Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them. Push
the heater switch to turn the power
on or off. The pilot lamp lights and
remains on while the heaters are on.
Do not use the seat heaters when the
engine is off or when idling for a
long period of time. They can drain
the battery, making your vehicle
hard to start.
Because of the sensors for the side
airbag system, there is no heater in
the seat-back.
On EX-L model in Canada
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
109
DRIVER’S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The driver’s door armrest has a
master power window control panel.
To open any of the passenger’s win-
dows, push down on the appropriate
switch and hold it until the window
reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull back on the
window switch. Release the switch
when the window gets to the position
you want.
Your vehicle’s windows are electri-
cally-powered. Turn the ignition
switch to ON (II) to raise or lower
any window.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
Instruments and Controls
Power Windows
110
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
The light in the AUTO switch comes
on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passengers’ windows. When you
push in the MAIN switch, the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. The MAIN switch
does not affect the driver’s window.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again. Keep the MAIN switch
pushed in when you have children in
the vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
AUTO
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse. You should do
the following.
Start the engine. Push down on
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
Pull back on the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If the driver’s window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Any impact due to road conditions
may cause the auto reverse function
work unexpectedly on the closing
window. If it happens frequently,
there is a problem with your power
window system. You should have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer. You can still close the
window by pulling back on the
window switch lightly and hold it.
1.
2.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
Auto Reverse
112
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
( ). To close the moonroof,
press and hold the top of the switch
( ). To open the moonroof,
press and hold the bottom of the
switch ( ). Release the switch
when the moonroof gets to the
desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be ON (II).
On EX model in the U.S., and EX-L
model in Canada
Instruments and Controls
Moonroof
113
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the driver’s
door armrest:
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
3.
4.1.
2.
Instruments and Controls
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
114
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the center table, pull up the
outside edge of the table until it
latches. To store it, pull the lever and
lower the table.
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Sitting on or getting under the table,
or putting heavy objects on the table,
may damage or deform it.
Do not put any items on the table
while driving. They may fall down or
fly around when you go around
corners or brake hard.
On EX and EX-L models in Canada
Instruments and Controls
Mirrors, Center Table
Center Table
115
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The center table has a beverage
holder for the front passengers.
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down. To use the front beverage holder,
pull on the handle. Push the holder
all the way in to close it.
Only on vehicles with an automatic
transmission
Instruments and Controls
Beverage Holders
116
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The cargo area floor can be taken
out and used as a table.
To remove the table, pull up the
carpet. Lift and pull on the handle to
slidethetableout.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Instruments and Controls
Built-in Table
Beverage Holders, Built-in Table
117
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unfold the legs. Lock them in place
by pushing on the middle of the
locking arms. Make sure all four are
locked.
To fold the legs, pull on the middle
of each locking arm.
To put the table back in place, hold
on to the handle and put the
projection on the table into the hole
in the cargo area floor.
Built-in Table
Instruments and Controls
118
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be sure to lock the legs of the
table.
Do not stand on the table.
Do not put a weight of over 44 lbs
(20kg)onthetable.
Hot items such as pots, pans, or
kettles should not be placed
directly on the table top.
A storage box is located under the
front passenger’s seat. To use it, pull
upward slightly on the front center
edge of the box and slide it out.
Open the center pocket by pulling
thehandle.Closeitwithafirmpush.
CONTINUED
Only on vehicles with an automatic
transmission
Instruments and Controls
Storage BoxCenter Pocket
Built-in Table, Center Pocket, Storage Box
Using the Built-in Table
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove the box for cleaning, pull
upward on the front center edge to
disengage the locking tabs under the
seat bottom, then pull the box out.
To open the driver’s pocket, swing
the lid down. Close it with a firm
push. The coin tray is located on the center
dashboard. To open the coin tray,
pull on the bottom edge. Close it
with a firm push. The light in the
traycomesonwhentheinstrument
panel lights are on.
Only on vehicles with a manual
transmission
Driver’s Pocket Coin Tray
Storage Box, Driver’s Pocket, Coin Tray
Instruments and Controls
120
DRIVER’S POCKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
The rear seat grab rails can also be
used as coat hooks.
This hook is not designed for large
or heavy items.
Instruments and Controls
Sunglasses Holder Coat Hook
Sunglasses Holder, Coat Hook
121
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
Push
GRABRAIL
COAT HOOK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). To power an accessory, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
When both sockets are being used,
the combined power rating of both
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets. One is located on the
dashboard, and the other is on the
left side of the cargo area.
To use an accessory power socket,
pull up on the cover.
Instruments and Controls
Accessory Power Sockets
122
Front Rear
Pull up
Pull up
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the dashboard pocket,
swing the lid down. Close it with a
firm push.
Dashboard Pocket
Instruments and Controls
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you leave any door open with the
keynotintheignitionswitch,the
ceiling light will go off after three
minutes.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light fades out in about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
key, the lock tab on the driver’s door,
the master door lock switch, or the
remote transmitter (see page ).
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
button next to each light. Push the
button again to turn it off. You can
use the spotlights at all times.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open any door. After all
doors are closed tightly, the light
fades out in about 30 seconds. In the
ON position, the ceiling light stays
on continuously.
90
Instruments and Controls
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light Spotlights
124
ON
OFF
DOOR ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo area light has a three-
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, the light comes on
when you open the tailgate or the
hatch glass. In the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
The ignition switch light comes on
when you unlock the driver’s door,
and fades out about 30 seconds after
you close the door.
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
Cargo Area Light Ignition Switch Light
125
ON
OFF
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
TAILGATE/HATCH GLASS ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
126
Main Menu
.....................Heating and Cooling . 128
.........What Each Control Does . 128
............How to Use the System . 131
..........To Turn Everything Off . 136
................................Audio System . 137
Audio System (U.S. and
........................Canadian LX) . 138
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Audio
....................................System . 138
.................Operating the Radio . 139
.................Adjusting the Sound . 143
............Audio System Lighting . 144
..............................Digital Clock . 144
.........Operating the CD Player . 146
....CD Player Error Indications . 148
.....Operating the CD Changer . 149
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 150
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 151
............Tape Search Functions . 152
Audio System (U.S. EX and
.......Canadian EX and EX-L) . 154
AM/FM/Cassette/CD
........Changer Audio System . 154
.................Operating the Radio . 155
.................Adjusting the Sound . 159
............Audio System Lighting . 160
....................Radio Frequencies . 160
........................Radio Reception . 161
..............................Digital Clock . 162
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 164
............Tape Search Functions . 165
Caring for the Cassette
.....................................Player . 168
.....Operating the CD Changer . 169
..Loading CDs in the Changer . 170
...................................Operation . 172
Removing CDs from the
.................................Changer . 174
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 176
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 177
.......................Theft Protection . 178
...............................Cruise Control . 179
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
127
Main Menu
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for the best
visibility.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
This button turns the air condi-
tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
in the button lights when the A/C is
on.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
Use the MODE control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
vents in all modes.
81
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control DialTemperature Control Dial
128
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
With these two modes, the A/C
stays on.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable.
To adjust the air flow from each
center vent, move the tab up-and-
down and side-to-side.
The vents in the corners of the
dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials next to them.
To adjust the air flow from each side
vent, pivot the vent up-and-down and
move the tab side-to-side.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Vent Controls
130
CENTER VENTS
DRIVER’S SIDE VENT
Open
Close
PASSENGER’S-SIDE VENT
Open
Close
TABS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the tailgate.
1.
2.
3.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Ventilation
How to Use the System
131
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the mode control dial to MAX
A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects and
switches to Recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Cool with A/C
132
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
MAX A/C
POSITION
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the interior is very warm from
beingparkedinthesun,youcancool
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way:
Start the engine.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. Make sure the tempera-
ture control dial is all the way to
the left.
Set the fan to maximum speed.
Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.
When the interior has cooled down
to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.
To warm the interior:
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
Start the engine.
Select .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
74
CONTINUED
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Heat
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the vehicle has been sitting out
in cold weather:
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches
to Fresh Air mode and turns on
the A/C.
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
To Heat and Dehumidify with Air
Conditioning
To Defog and Defrost
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
134
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can
close the side vents with the dial
beside each vent. This will send
more warm air to the windshield
defroster vents.
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR DEFOGGER
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
No air flow can cause the windows to
fogup.Itisrecommendedthatyou
keep the fan on at all times so stale
air and moisture do not build up in
the interior and cause fogging.
To Turn Everything Off
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has either of the audio
systems described in this section.
Read the appropriate pages in this
section for operation of the audio
system installed in your vehicle.
Also, read page for how to take
care of your cassette player.
If your vehicle has a different audio
system from these two types, read
the radio manufacturer’s manual that
came with your vehicle for its
operation.
pages 138 to 153 for LX model
pages 154 to 177 for EX and EX-L
models
168
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
EX and EX-L Models
LX Model
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).178
On LX model in the U.S. and Canada
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Audio
System
138
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
Operating the Radio
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
139
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
AM BUTTON
SEEK BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
FM BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
○○
−
−
−＋
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset buttons.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either SEEK button ( or ), then
release it. Depending on which
SEEK button you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
140
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
CONTINUED
AUTO SELECT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
A. SEL BUTTON
A. SEL INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
142
SCAN INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
These two
controls adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
The Balance control adjusts the side-
to-side strength, while the Fader
control adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
To adjust the fader, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,
and adjust the front-to-back sound to
your liking. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
To adjust the balance, push on the
TREBLE/BALANCE control knob
to get it to pop out. Pull it out slightly
farther, and adjust the side-to-side
sound to your liking. Push the knob
back in when you are done so you
cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
Use these controls
to adjust the tone to your liking.
To adjust the Treble level, push on
the TREBLE/BALANCE control
knob to get it to pop out. Without
pulling it out farther, turn the knob
to adjust the treble level. Push the
knob back in when you are done so
you cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
To adjust the Bass level, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Without pulling it out
farther, turn the knob to adjust the
bass level. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
BASS/FADER
CONTROL
TREBLE/BALANCE
CONTROL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
For information, see page .
The audio system display usually
shows the time when the ignition
switch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II). It shows the operation mode of
the radio, cassette player, CD player,
or optional CD changer when you
operate them, then goes back to the
time display after five seconds.
If an error occurs while operating
the CD player or optional CD
changer, the display will keep
showing the error code and will not
switch to the time display until the
error is corrected (see pages and
).
You can set the time only when the
clock is displayed.
To set the time, press the CLOCK
(SCAN/RPT) button until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink.
Press and hold the H (Preset 4)
button until the hour advances to the
desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5)
button until the minutes advance to
the desired time.
Press the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT)
button again to enter the set time.
160
148
150
77
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Digital Clock
144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, the clock is set
back to the previous hour by
pressing the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT)
button until you hear a beep, then
pressing the RESET (Preset 6)
button. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, the clock is set
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
For example:
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the time
setting will be lost. To set the time
again, follow the setting procedure.
1:06 would RESET to 1:00
1:52 would RESET to 2:00
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
RESET BUTTON
M BUTTON
H BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the system on, insert the disc
into the CD slot. Push the disc in
halfway, the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way and begin to play.
The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
Operating the CD Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
146
CD SLOT
REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON RDM BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
○
○
−
○
○
＋
−
＋
−
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
the RDM button. You will see RDM
in the display. The system will then
select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold an appropriate SKIP button.
Press the button to move forward,
or the button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the Repeat
button. You will see REPEAT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
Repeat button again to turn it off.
Each time you press the button
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM or
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
176
RANDOM PLAY
REPEAT
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Cause Solution
Mechanical Error
High temperature
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperatue returns to
normal.
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
148
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
A Compact Disc changer is available
from your dealer. It holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CD’s in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1 6). If
you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
Ifyouejectthediscinthein-dash
CD while it is playing, the system
will automatically switch to the CD
changer and begin play where it left
off. If there are no CDs in the
changer, the display will flash. You
will have to select another mode
(AM or FM) with the button.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.176
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the
chart to the right. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle
to your Honda dealer.
Cause Solution
Disc-changer
malfunction
Disc is in changer
mechanism
High temperature
Misconnection or
disconnection of CD
changer
No CD magazine in the
CD changer
No CD in magazine
Consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button, and insert an
empty magazine.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
See your Honda dealer.
Insert CD magazine.
Insert CD in magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
150
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
CONTINUED
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
To operate the cassette player, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Operating the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
PLAY
BUTTON
REW
BUTTON
FF BUTTON
PROG BUTTON CD BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
DOLBY
BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
−
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the AM,
FM or CD button. To change back to
the cassette player, push the TAPE
button.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
○
○
−
＋
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the REPEAT
button to activate it; you will see
REPEAT displayed as a reminder.
When the system reaches the end of
the song or passage currently
playing, it will automatically go into
rewind. When it senses the
beginning of the same song or
passage, the system returns to PLAY
mode. It will continue to repeat this
same program until you deactivate
REPEAT by pressing the button
again.
The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the button. You will
see REW flashing in the display as
thetaperewinds.Toskiptothe
beginning of the next song, push the
button. You will see FF flashing in
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the begin-
ning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
168
REPEATSKIP
Caring for Cassettes
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
The in-dash CD changer holds up to
six discs. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. See page for CD
changer operation.
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
169
2
On EX model in the U.S., and EX and
EX-L models in Canada
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer
Audio System
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
154
PWR/VOL KNOB
FM BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS
AM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
ST INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
○○
−＋
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset buttons.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either SEEK button ( or ), then
release it. Depending on which
SEEK button you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).178
CONTINUED
Operating the Radio
TUNE
SEEK
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
1.
2.
3.
4.
SCAN Preset
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
156
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
157
PWR/VOL KNOB
FM BUTTON A. SEL
INDICATOR
A. SEL
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS
TUNE KNOBAM BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
158
PWR/VOL KNOB
FM BUTTON A. SEL
INDICATOR
A. SEL
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS
AM BUTTON TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The
displayed number shows you the
current setting. When the
adjustment level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFAdtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAd adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
159
Adjustment Level TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Select BAL or FAd by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The displayed number
shows you the current setting. When
the adjustment level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
MODE knob.
77
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting Radio Frequencies
160
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
pheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio Reception
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
The audio system display usually
shows the time when the ignition
switch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II). It shows the operation mode of
the radio, cassette player, or CD
changer when you operate them,
then goes back to the time display
after five seconds.
If an error occurs while operating
the CD changer, the display will
keep showing the error code and will
not switch to the time display until
the error is corrected (see page ).
You can set the time only when the
clock is displayed.
177
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Digital Clock
162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press and hold the H (Preset 4)
button until the hour advances to the
desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5)
button until the minutes advance to
the desired time.
Press the CLOCK (FM) button again
to enter the set time.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00
1:52 would RESET to 2:00
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the time
setting will be lost. To set the time
again, follow the setting procedure.
To set the time, press the CLOCK
(FM) button until you hear a beep.
The displayed time begins to blink.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, the clock is set
back to the previous hour by
pressing the CLOCK (FM) button
until you hear a beep, then pressing
the R (Preset 6) button. If the
displayed time is after the half hour,
the clock is set forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
163
CLOCK BUTTON H BUTTON M BUTTON R BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio or CD
changer while listening to a tape,
presstheAM,FMorCDbutton.To
change back to the cassette player,
press the TAPE button.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Cassette Player
164
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. To
rewind the tape, push the REW
button. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the FF button. You will see FF
displayed. Press the FF, REW or
PLAY button to take the system out
of rewind or fast forward. When the
system reaches the end of the tape,
it reverses direction and begins to
play.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
165
PWR/VOL
KNOB
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
CASSETTE SLOT
DOLBY INDICATOR
PLAY
BUTTON
FM BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
AM BUTTON
REW
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
FF BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
TAPE
BUTTON
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
○
○
○○
−
＋
−＋
The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the button. You will
see REW flashing in the display as
thetaperewinds.Toskiptothe
beginning of the next song, push the
button. You will see FF flashing in
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the begin-
ning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either of the SKIP
buttons ( or ).
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SKIP
166
RPT BUTTON
REW BUTTON
FF BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
RPT INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the REW or FF button, or
either of the SKIP buttons, also turns
off REPEAT.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ on U.S. EX, and Canadian
EX and EX-L models/‘‘ ’’ on
LX model on the display, press the
TAPE EJECT button to remove the
cassette from the unit. Make sure
thetapeisnotdamaged.Ifthe
cassette will not eject or the error
indication stays on after the cassette
ejects, take the vehicle to your
Honda dealer.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Caring for the Cassette Player
168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in
the drive or cause other problems.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Your Honda’s audio system has an
in-dash CD changer that holds up to
six discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio and
cassette player.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
CONTINUED
Operating the CD Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
169
LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT
PWR/VOL
KNOB
REPEAT BUTTON
RDM BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS
CD EJECT
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To load multiple CDs in one
operation:
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the Load button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
To load a single CD:
Ontheupperleftsideofthe
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking
and the green CD Loaded
indicator will come on.
When LOAd appears again in the
display, insert the next disc into
the CD slot.
Insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way.YouwillseeBUSYinthe
display. The CD loaded indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAd’’ in the upper display, then
release the button.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, and you do not
press the LOAD button, the system
will wait for ten seconds, then stop
the load operation and begin playing
the last CD loaded.
Press and release the LOAD
button.
The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.
The disc number for an empty
position starts to blink and the
green CD Loaded indicator comes
on.WhenyouseeLOAdinthe
display, insert the disc into the CD
slot. Insert it only about halfway;
the drive will pull it in the rest of
the way.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
Loading CDs in the Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
170
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate preset
button. Select an empty position (the
disc number indicator is off), and
press the preset button for that
position (1 to 6). The system will
stop playing the current CD and start
the loading sequence. It will then
play the CD just loaded.
If you press the LOAD button while
a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
171
LOAD BUTTON DISC NUMBER
CD SLOT CD LOADED INDICATOR
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
TAPE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
＋
−
＋
−
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate Preset button (1 6). If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
CD changer, the system will go into
the loading sequence (see page ).
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display as a reminder. The system
continuously replays the current
track. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing either of the
SKIP buttons also turns off the
repeat feature.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks
within a CD in random order, rather
than in the order they are recorded
on the CD. To activate Random Play,
press the RDM button. You will see
RDM in the display. The system will
then select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again, or you select a
different CD with a preset button.
Each time you press the button
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the appropriate SKIP
button. Press the button to move
forward. You will see CUE displayed.
To move backward, press the
button. You will see REW displayed.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
170
Operation
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
172
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM or FM button, or insert
a cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the TAPE button. When you return
to CD mode by pressing the CD
button, play will continue at the same
point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
173
PWR/VOL KNOB RDM INDICATOR RPT INDICATOR
FM
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
CD
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
RPT BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP
BUTTONS
TAPE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds and put the CD
changer in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the eject
button.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the Eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. When
you remove the disc from the slot,
the system automatically begins the
Load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not load another CD, the system
goes back to the time display. If you
selected radio or tape mode before
removing the disc, the system
selects the previous mode (AM, FM,
or Tape).
Removing CDs from the Changer
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
174
CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you press the Eject button while
listening to the radio or tape, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the Eject button again will eject the
next disc in the numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject up to six discs, one at a
time.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These and contamination from
fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens
can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
176
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
No CD in the CD
changer
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,
check for error indication. Insert the CDs again.
If the code does not disappear or the CD cannot
be pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,
check for error indication. Insert the CD again.
If the code does not disappear or the CD cannot
be pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
youwillsee‘‘ ’’inthe
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the Preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code. If
it is entered correctly, the radio will
start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, the user
must enter a specific five-digit code
in the Preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
Theft Protection
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the vehicle under
those conditions.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
179
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Press and release the SET/decel
buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The vehicle will
accelerate. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your vehicle will speed
up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).3.
Changing the Set Speed
Comfort and Convenience Features
Cruise Control
180
RESUME/accel
SET/decel
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal will cause the cruise
control to cancel.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The vehicle will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
decel button. The vehicle will then
maintain the desired speed.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
CONTINUED
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
181
CANCEL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out and the
vehicle will begin to slow down. You
can use the accelerator pedal in the
normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
the RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light comes on,
and the vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
Using the
Cruise Control
182
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your Honda,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your vehicle,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 184
.........................................Gasoline . 184
.........Service Station Procedures . 185
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 185
....................Opening the Hood . 186
...............................Oil Check . 188
.........Engine Coolant Check . 189
...............................Fuel Economy . 190
.....................Vehicle Condition . 190
...........................Driving Habits . 190
...Accessories and Modifications . 191
.............................Carrying Cargo . 193
Before Driving
Before Driving
183
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
184
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, park
with that side closest to the
service station pumps.
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
Your vehicle has an on-board
refueling vapor recovery system to
help keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. If the fuel
nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there
maybeaproblemwiththissystem.
Consult your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Filling the Fuel Tank
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
185
Pull
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Standing in front of the vehicle,
put your fingers between the front
edge of the hood and the front
grille. The hood latch handle is
above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this
handle up until it releases the
hood. Lift the hood.
1. 2.
5.
6.
327
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
186
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole in
the hood.
3.
266
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
187
CLIP
SUPPORT ROD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a
few minutes after turning the engine
off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its tube.2.
1.
3.
Oil Check
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
188
DIPSTICK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
4.
245
247
251
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Adding Oil
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check
189
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX RESERVE TANK
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always maintain your vehicle accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
This will keep it in top operating
condition.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
The condition of your vehicle and
your driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cut down on air conditioning use.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your vehicle’s underside adds weight
and rolling resistance. Frequent
cleaning helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
245
Vehicle Condition
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
190
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page for
additional information.) If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Before installing any accessory:
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your vehicle’s electrical system
capacity, they can interfere with the
operation of your vehicle, or even
cause the airbags to deploy.
192
331
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
191
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to impact speed
bumps or other raised objects,
which could cause the airbags to
deploy.
Raising the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult with your Honda dealer.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with non-
Honda (aftermarket) components
could seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Modifications
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a f ront door.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
192
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
operation, and make it unsafe.
Before carrying any type of cargo, be
sure to read the following pages.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The cargo area is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the back
seats can be folded to allow you to
carry more cargo or longer items.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
193
CARGO UNDER-FLOOR STORAGE
TAILGATE POCKETS DOOR POCKETS
STORAGE BOX
DASHBOARD POCKET
CARGO AREA SEAT-BACK
POCKETS
CENTER POCKET GLOVE BOX
A/T model only
Main Menu
Table of Contents
×
−
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs (395 kg).
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
The maximum load limit for your car
is 850 lbs (395 kg).
Following are the steps for
determining the correct cargo and
luggage load limit.
For example, if there will be four 150
lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115
kg).
4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280
kg)
850 lbs (395 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =
250 lbs (115 kg)
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850 lbs
(395 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard
(on the driver’s doorjamb).
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle. (Five
is the seating capacity of your
vehicle.)
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.Determine the combined weight
of accessories, luggage, and cargo
beingloadedinthevehicle.The
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4 [250
lbs(115kg)inthisexample].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
194
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate or the hatch glass, exhaust
gas can enter the passenger area.
To avoid the possibility of
, follow the
instructions on page .
If you can carry any items on a
roofrack,besurethetotalweight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Honda
dealer for further information.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
To secure cargo, use the four floor
hooks in the cargo area. Make sure
all stored items are secured before
driving.60
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
carbon
monoxide poisoning
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
195
HOOKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store only small, lightweight items in
the pockets on the back of the
tailgate.
To secure cargo, use the four floor
hooks in the cargo area. Make sure
all stored items are secured before
driving.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
Tailgate Pockets
196
TAILGATE POCKETS
TAILGATE POCKETS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
5-speed manual and automatic
transmissions. It also includes
important information on parking
your vehicle, the braking system,
and facts you need if you are plan-
ning to tow a trailer or drive off-
highway.
........................Driving Guidelines . 198
........................Preparing to Drive . 199
.......................Starting the Engine . 200
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 201
....5-speed Manual Transmission . 202
.....Recommended Shift Points . 203
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 203
..............Automatic Transmission . 204
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 204
................Shift Lever Positions . 205
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 208
....................Shift Lock Release . 209
...........................................Parking . 210
.....................The Braking System . 211
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 211
...............Brake System Design . 212
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 212
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 213
........................ABS Indicator . 214
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 215
...........................Towing a Trailer . 217
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
................................Motorhome . 224
..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 226
.................General Information . 226
.Important Safety Precautions . 227
...............................Driving Tips . 228
Driving
Driving
197
Main Menu
Your CR-V has higher ground
clearance than a passenger vehicle
designed only for use on pavement.
Higher ground clearance has many
advantages for off-highway driving.
It allows you to travel over bumps
and unpaved roads. It also provides
good visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Theseadvantagescomeatsomecost.
Because your vehicle is taller and
rides higher off the ground, it has a
high center of gravity. This means
that your vehicle can tip or roll over
if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Your CR-V is equipped with a unique
four-wheel drive (4WD) system.
Normally, power is delivered only to
the front wheels. When the system
senses a loss of front-wheel traction,
it automatically transfers some
power to the rear wheels. This gives
you better traction and mobility.
While this system can provide
increasedtractiononslippery
surfaces, you still need to exercise
thesamecarewhenaccelerating,
steering, and braking that you would
in a two-wheel drive vehicle.
To prevent the risk of rollover or
loss of control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
See page for additional guidelines
for driving off-highway.
Four-wheel Drive Models
226
Driving Guidelines
Driving
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Check that the hood, tailgate and
hatch glass are fully closed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
97
114
83
17
200
65
Driving
Preparing to Drive
199
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
Driving
Starting the Engine
200
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet
(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
3.
2.
1.
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
Starting the Engine
Driving
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The manual transmission is syn-
chronizedinallforwardgearsfor
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from Fifth
to Reverse. When shifting up or
down,makesureyoupushtheclutch
pedal down all the way, shift to the
next gear, and let the pedal up
gradually. When you are not shifting,
do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal. This can cause your clutch to
wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into Reverse, or shift into
one of the forward gears for a
moment. This stops the gears so
they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure engine speed will not go
into the tachometer’s red zone in the
lower gear.
5-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
202
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis-
sions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
48 mph (77 km/h)
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Driving
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
5-speed Manual Transmission
203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s transmission has four
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid accelera-
tion and have the transmission
checkedbyanauthorizedHonda
dealer as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
come on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator
if there is a problem in the automatic
transmission control system.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Driving
Automatic Transmission
204
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
The shift lever has six positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on the
brake pedal, and keep your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwiththe
brake pedal depressed when the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I).
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Move the shift
lever to the left and down to shift out
of the Park positon.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoN
NtoD
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoR
RtoP
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, then
move the shift lever.
Move the lever.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Positions
Park (P)
205
SHIFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the vehicle
for any reason. Press on the brake pe-
dal when you are moving the shift
lever from Neutral to another gear.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift.
Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
Reverse when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If you cannot shift to Reverse when
the vehicle is stopped, press the
brake pedal and slowly shift to
Neutral, and then to Reverse.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your vehicle’s
battery is disconnected or goes dead,
you cannot shift to Reverse. (Refer
to Shift Lock Release on page ).
209
209
Neutral (N)
Reverse (R)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
206
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
You may notice the transmission
shifting up at higher speeds when
the engine is cold. This helps the
engine warm up faster.
For faster acceleration, you can get
the transmission to automatically
downshift by pushing the accelerator
pedal to the floor. The transmission
will shift down one or two gears,
depending on your speed. Pressing the O/D switch again turns
theOver-drivemodebackon.
Over-drivecanbeturnedonoroff
only when the ignition switch is ON
(II) and the shift lever is in the D
position. Over-drive mode turns on
every time you start the engine, even
if you turned it off the last time you
drove the vehicle.
TheOver-drive(O/D)ison
whenever you turn the ignition ON
(II). You can turn it off by pressing
the O/D switch on the edge of the
shift lever. The O/D OFF indicator
on the instrument panel next to the
shift lever position indicator will
come on.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Drive (D)
Over-drive (O/D) Mode
207
OVER-DRIVE OFF INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
WhentheOver-driveisoff,the
transmission selects only the first
three gears. Turn the O/D off to
provide engine braking when going
down a steep hill. You can also avoid
the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
The O/D OFF indicator also comes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON(II).
This position locks
thetransmissioninsecondgear.It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop. Second
gives you more power when climbing,
and increased engine braking when
going down steep hills. Use second
gear when starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow. It will help
reduce wheelspin.
With the lever in this
position, the transmission locks in
First gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, and D,
you can operate this transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
If you shift into First position when
the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h), the transmission shifts
into Second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
Engine Speed LimiterSecond (2)
First (1)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
208
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work. This procedure
is also used to release the Reverse
Lockout.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
theshiftlever.Useasmallflat-
tipped screwdriver or small metal
plate (neither are included in the
tool kit) to remove the cover.
Carefully pry on the edge of the
cover.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
make sure the ignition switch is in
the ACCESSORY(I) position.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
Set the Parking brake.
Insert a screwdriver in the Shift
Lock Release slot.
Push down on the screwdriver and
move the shift lever out of Park to
Neutral.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
move the shift lever from Neutral
to Reverse, then to Park.
Remove the Screwdriver from the
Shift Lock Release slot, then
install a new cover. Make sure the
notchonthecoverisontheright
side. Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your Honda
dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
209
COVER
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. The indicator
on the instrument panel shows that
the parking brake is not fully
released; it does not indicate that the
parking brake is firmly set. Make
sure the parking brake is set firmly
or your vehicle may roll if it is
parked on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission making it easier to
move the shift lever out of Park
when you want to drive away.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb.
If you have a manual transmission,
putitinfirstgear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels toward the curb. If
you have a manual transmission, put
it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Lock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or the remote
transmitter.
Make sure the hatch glass is
closed securely.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Turn off the lights.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Parking Tips
Driving
Parking
210
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brakewearindicators.Theymakea
very audible ‘‘screeching.’’
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Your Honda is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS (on
vehicles equipped with ABS) helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the vehicle
continues straight ahead even
though you turn the steering wheel.
The ABS helps to prevent lock-up
and helps you retain steering control
by pumping the brakes rapidly; much
faster than a person can do it.
ABS helps to prevent the wheels
from locking up and skidding during
hard braking, allowing you to retain
steering control.
The ABS also balances the front-to
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Standard for EX model in the U.S., and
EX and EX-L models in Canada
Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes
The Braking System
Driving
212
Front
Main Menu
Table of Contents
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal; it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
it only helps with steering
control during braking. You should
always maintain a safe following
distance from other vehicles.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
You should never pump the
brake pedal; ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle,
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Important Safety Reminders
The Braking System
Driving
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
68
329
ABS Indicator
The Braking System
Driving
214
ABS INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your vehicle longer
to react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defrosters and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
page ).
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-
quire a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your vehicle well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these condi-
tions.
134
CONTINUED
Driving Technique Visibility
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Traction
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
CONTINUED
Tongue Load:
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
217
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, the
tongue load must not exceed:
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
on the front axle
on the rear axle
and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
Driving
218
4,320 lbs (1,960 kg)
2,160 lbs (980 kg)
2,250 lbs (1,020 kg)
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chains drag on the ground.
CONTINUED
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitches
Safety Chains
Towing a Trailer
Driving
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
thedrawingaboveforthewiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
All states and Canadian provinces
require some type of trailer lights.
Check requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow.
If you use a converter, you can get
the connector and pins that mate
with the connector in your vehicle
from your Honda dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
220
GROUND
(BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/RED)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/YELLOW)
BATTERY
(WHITE/BLACK)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
If you tow frequently, follow the
Severe Conditions maintenance
schedule.
217 218
278
Additional Trailer Equipment
Pre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
Driving
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently between 3rd and 4th
gears while going up a hill, turn off
the Over drive (O/D) mode (see
page ).
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use the Over drive
(O/D) mode when towing a trailer
on level roads. Turn off the Over
drive (O/D) mode when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain (see page ).
(See ‘‘ ’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
207
207
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Driving on Hills
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing Speeds and Gears
222
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 3rd
gear on the manual transmission,
and turn off the Over drive (O/D)
mode on the automatic transmission.
Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
bottom
Parking
Backing Up
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Driving
Towing a Trailer
223
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When preparing to tow your CR-V,
make sure the transmission is
filled to the correct level (see page
). Do not overfill.
Leave the key in the ignition
switch and the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) so the steering
wheel does not lock. Make sure
the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power sockets
are turned off so you do not run
down the battery.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Release the parking brake.
After attaching the tow bar to your
motorhome, do the following to
prepare your CR-V for ‘‘flat towing’’:
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Your CR-V can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph(100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph(100km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur. To avoid damage
to the 4WD system, it must be towed
with all four wheels on the ground
(flat towing).
When preparing to tow your CR-V,
make sure the transmission is full of
fluid (see page ). Maintaining
the correct level is very important.
Do not overfill. Do the following
Follow the procedure exactly.
Otherwise, severe automatic
transmission damage will occur.
261
260
every day immediately before you begin
towing.
5-speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Shift the
lever through all the positions (P,
R, N, D, 2, 1)
ShifttoD,thentoN.Letthe
engine run for three minutes, then
turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) so the steering
wheel does not lock. Make sure
the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power sockets
are turned off so you do not run
down the battery.
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours.
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
IfyoutowaCR-Vwithanautomatic
transmission, the transmission fluid
must be changed every two years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Extended Towing
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
225
Failure to f ollow the above instructions
exactly will result in severe automatic
transmission damage. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely before you begin towing.
Severe automatic transmission damage
will occur if the vehicle is shif ted f rom
reverse to neutral and then towed with
the drive wheels on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your CR-V has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,
and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your CR-V will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. So be sure to read this
owner’s manual, pay special attention
to the precautions and tips in this
section, and get acquainted with
your vehicle before you leave the
pavement.
General Information
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
226
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remember that your CR-V has
higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than
passenger vehicles designed for use
only on pavement. This means your
vehicle can more easily tip or roll
over if you make abrupt turns or
drive on slopes.
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To avoid loss of control
or rollover, be sure to follow all
recommendations and precautions
on page and in this section.
Seat belts are just as important off-
road as on paved roads. Wherever
you drive, make sure you and your
passengers always wear seat belts. If
children or infants are along for the
ride, see that they are properly
secured. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt.
On many unpaved roads, you won’t
find lane markers, traffic signals, or
signs to warn you of possible trouble
ahead. It’s up to you to continually
assess the situation and drive within
limits.
The route presents limits (some
roads are too steep and bumpy for
example). You have limits (in driving
skills and comfort). And your vehicle
also has limits (traction, stability, and
power, for instance).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take proper precautions.
For example, you can have an
accident or rollover during
maneuvers such as turning, driving
on hills, or over large obstacles.
Be sure to store cargo properly, and
do not exceed your CR-V’s cargo or
trailer load limits (see pages and
).
194
198
217
Important Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
227
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in the owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe. Check
the tires for damage and for proper
pressure.
Driving off-highway can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the
pavement, be sure all scheduled
maintenance and service has been
done, and that you have inspected
your vehicle. Pay special attention to
the condition of the tires, and use a
gauge to check the tire pressures.
The following pages contain practical
tips on basic off-highway operation.
Off-highway, the general rule is to
keep your speed low. Of course,
you’ll need enough speed to keep
moving forward. But at higher
speeds, you have less time to assess
conditions and make good decisions.
There’s also a greater chance of
sliding if you brake or turn too
quickly on wet soil, gravel, or ice. In
any situation, never go faster than
conditions allow.
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway. You may even dig
yourself into a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second gear (2) will
help get you to a smooth start on
snow and ice.
Generally, the best off-pavement
braking technique is to gently
depress the brake pedal, then
increase pressure as more braking is
needed. Avoid hard braking. Keep in
mind that you will usually need more
time and distance to brake to a stop
on unpaved surfaces.
If you need to brake hard because of
an emergency, apply steady, even
pressure to the brake pedal. Do not
pump the brakes; let the anti-lock
braking system pump them for you.
If you pump the brakes, the anti-lock
cannot work as efficiently, and your
stopping distance may be increased.
With ABS
Driving Tips
Check Out Your Vehicle
Controlling Speed
Accelerating and Braking
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Bumps, holes, rocks, and other
obstacles can be hazardous. Debris
in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Even small rocks can cut your tires.
More important, because your
vehicle has a high center of gravity,
driving over a large obstacle, or
allowing a wheel to drop into a deep
hole, can cause your vehicle to tip or
roll over.
Drive slow enough to observe
obstacles ahead and maneuver
around them. If you can’t avoid a
serious obstacle, turn around and
look for a better route.
Before driving up or down a hill, stop
and assess the situation. If you can’t
clearly see all road conditions (good
traction, no bumps, holes or other
obstacles, a safe way out, etc.) walk
the slope before you drive on it. If
you have any doubt about whether
you can safely drive on the slope,
. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue (because of
the steepness, a large obstacle, etc.),
. Your vehicle
could roll over. Slowly back down the
hill, following the same route you
took up the hill.
You should have no problem making
sharp turns at low speed on level
ground. But never make an abrupt
turn at higher speeds, on or off
pavement. With a higher center of
gravity, your vehicle can more easily
tip or roll over.
Off-highway, the basic turning
technique is to drive at low speed
and gradually adjust the amount of
steering to suit the surface.
Test your brakes from time to time
to make sure they are operating
properly. This will also give you a
feel for how much traction you have
on a given surface.
don’t do it
do not try to turn around
Avoiding ObstaclesDriving on Slopes
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
Turning
229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid driving through deep water. If
you encounter water in your route (a
small stream or large puddle, for
example), evaluate it carefully before
going ahead. Make sure it is shallow,
flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of
the depth or the ground, turn around
andfindanotherroute.
Driving through deep water can also
damage your vehicle. The water can
get into the transmission and
differential, diluting the lubricant
and causing an eventual failure. It
can also wash the grease out of the
wheel bearings.
You should never use a jack to try
getting unstuck. A jack only works
on firm, level ground. Also, your
vehicle could easily slip off the jack
and hurt you or someone else.
Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,
or other surfaces where you could
get stuck. If you do happen to get
stuck because of inclement weather
or other conditions, choose a safe
and appropriate course of action.
If You Encounter Water
If You Get Stuck
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
230
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you spin the wheels excessively
trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat the components of the
4-wheel drive system. If this happens,
the 4-wheel drive system shuts off
and only the front wheels receive
power. If this happens, stop and
allow everything to cool down. The
4-wheel drive system will work again
after its temperature drops.
If you slip the clutch for a long time
while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage it.
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
232
Main Menu
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 234
.Important Safety Precautions . 235
.................Maintenance Schedule . 236
...Required Maintenance Record . 243
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 245
..............................Fluid Locations . 246
......................................Engine Oil . 247
..................................Adding Oil . 247
....................Recommended Oil . 247
..............................Synthetic Oil . 248
....................................Additives . 248
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 249
.............................Cooling System . 251
............Adding Engine Coolant . 251
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 253
....................Windshield Washers . 258
.......................Transmission Fluid . 260
..........Automatic Transmission . 260
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 261
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 262
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 263
............................Brake System . 263
...........................Clutch System . 264
..............................Power Steering . 264
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 265
....................................Hood Latch . 266
....................................Spark Plugs . 267
..............................Replacement . 267
............................Specifications . 268
...........................................Battery . 269
.................................Wiper Blades . 271
..............Air Conditioning System . 274
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 275
.......................................Drive Belt . 277
...............................................Tires . 278
......................................Inflation . 278
Recommended Tire
Pressures for Normal
...........................Driving . 279
Tire Pressure Adjustment for
..........High Speed Driving . 279
..................................Inspection . 280
..............................Maintenance . 280
.............................Tire Rotation . 281
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 282
......................Wheels and Tires . 283
..........................Winter Driving . 283
.............................Snow Tires . 283
............................Tire Chains . 284
.............................................Lights . 285
.....................Headlight Aiming . 287
........................Replacing Bulbs . 287
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 295
357
Maintenance
Maintenance
233
Main Menu
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is
the best way to protect your
investment. Proper maintenance is
essential to your safety and the
safety of your passengers. It will also
reward you with more economical,
trouble-free driving, and help reduce
air pollution.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Maintenance
Maintenance Safety
234
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your vehicle is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
235
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
vehicle as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your
vehicle serviced and what things
need attention. It is essential that
you have your vehicle serviced as
scheduled to retain its high level of
safety, dependability, and emissions
control performance.
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your vehicle. The
load limit is shown on the label on
the driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your vehicle
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a roof
rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.184
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
U.S. Owners
236
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
−
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
We recommend the use of genuine
Honda parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
or NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’
condition, you should follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Canadian Owners
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance
238
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
10
16
50
80
70
112
110
176
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Service the following items at the recommended intervals.
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace transmission fluid
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
20
32
30
48
40
64
60
96
80
128
100
160
120
192
90
144
24 48 7212 36 60
M/T
A/T
237
:
:
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＃
:
Maintenance
239
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A, B, C, D
A
B
C
D
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 281 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000 km
(independent of time).
10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
30,000 mi/48,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
3yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
6yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in D.
Do items in A, C.
Do items in A, B.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A.
Do item in D.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in D.
Do items in A, C.
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).
Do items in A, B.
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A.
Do item in D.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then
replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
Inspect idle speed.
236
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty,
last column, page .237
NOTE:
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＃
＃＃
＊
Maintenance
240
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km) or 2 years
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,
otherwise use normal schedule
Service the following items at the recommended intervals.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Lubricate door hinges, locks, and latches
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace transmission fluid
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
10
16
20
32
30
48
40
64
50
80
60
96
70
112
80
128
90
144
100
160
110
176
120
192
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years
24 48 7212 36 60
M/T
A/T
:
: 237
275
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
241
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A, B, C, D, E
A
B
C
D
E
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
Replace engine oil.
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 281 ).
Lubricate door hinges, locks, and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace dust and pollen filter .
Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/
24,000 km (independent of time) under dusty
conditions, otherwise use Normal Conditions
schedule.
5,000 mi/8,000 km/½ yr
10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr
15,000 mi/24,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1-½ yrs
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
20,000 mi/32,000 km/2 yrs
25,000 mi/40,000 km/2-½ yrs
30,000 mi/48,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
30,000 mi/48,000 km/3 yrs
35,000 mi/56,000 km/3-½ yrs
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
40,000 mi/64,000 km/4 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km
45,000 mi/72,000 km/4-½ yrs
3yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/5 yrs
55,000 mi/88,000 km/5-½ yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km/6 yrs
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in E.
Do item in A.
Do items in B, C.
Do item in A.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Do items in B, D.
Do item in A.
Do item in A.
Do items in B, C.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Do item in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do item in B.
Do item in A.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
DoitemsinB,C,D.
Do item in A.
236
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＊
＃
Maintenance
242
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
NOTE:
275
237
65,000 mi/104,000 km/6-½ yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km/7 yrs
75,000 mi/120,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/7-½ yrs
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
80,000 mi/128,000 km/8 yrs
85,000 mi/136,000 km/8-½ yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/9 yrs
95,000 mi/152,000 km/9-½ yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km/10 yrs
105,000 mi/168,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/10-½ yrs
6yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km/11 yrs
115,000 mi/184,000 km/11-½ yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/12 yrs
160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 years
Do item in A.
Do item in B.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Do item in A.
Do items in B, C.
Do item in A.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).
Do items in B, D.
Do item in A.
Do item in A.
Do items in B, C.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Do item in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Do item in B.
Do item in A.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
DoitemsinB,C,D.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
Do item in A.
Inspect idle speed.
:
:
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
243
5,000 mi
10,000 mi
15,000 mi
20,000 mi
25,000 mi
30,000 mi
35,000 mi
40,000 mi
45,000 mi
50,000 mi
55,000 mi
60,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
8,000 km
16,000 km
24,000 km
32,000 km
(or 1 year)
40,000 km
48,000 km
56,000 km
64,000 km
(or 2 years)
72,000 km
80,000 km
88,000 km
96,000 km
(or 3 years)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
238
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
Maintenance
244
65,000 mi
70,000 mi
75,000 mi
80,000 mi
85,000 mi
90,000 mi
95,000 mi
100,000 mi
105,000 mi
110,000 mi
115,000 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
104,000 km
112,000 km
120,000 km
128,000 km
(or 4 years)
136,000 km
144,000 km
152,000 km
160,000 km
(or 5 years)
168,000 km
176,000 km
184,000 km
192,000 km
(or 6 years)
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page .
188
189
258
260
278
285
263
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
246
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Pour the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
CONTINUED
Recommended OilAdding Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
247
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your vehicle
according to this chart.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
Additives
248
Ambient Temperature
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1.
2.
4.
3.
CONTINUED
Changing the Oil and Filter
Engine Oil
Maintenance
249
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
OIL FILTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
250
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing. If it is not available, you may
use another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
1.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
251
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill. Clean
up any spills immediately. Spilled
coolant could damage components
in the engine compartment.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cooling System
Maintenance
252
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the vehicle.
Unless you have the tools and
knowledge, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Remove the radiator cap.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the heater temperature control
dial fully clockwise. Turn the
ignition off.
Openthehood.Makesurethe
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
1.
2.
3.
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. Drain the
coolant into an appropriate
container.
Before draining the coolant,
remove the cover under the
radiator. Use a phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the two
bolts, and remove the sixteen
holding clips from the cover (12
clips on the bottom and 4 clips on
the side) with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Then pull the cover
down.
4. 5.
Cooling System
Maintenance
254
HOLDING CLIP
BOLT BOLT
DRAIN PLUG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To drain the coolant from the
reserve tank:
Remove the reserve tank
mounting bolt with a wrench, pull
out the coolant tube from the two
clips on the upper and lower side
of the fan shroud, then move the
reserve tank away from the fan
shroud while pulling the bottom
tab of the reserve tank out of the
hole.
Remove the coolant tube from the
four clips.
Use a wrench to remove the bolt
from the battery hold-down.
Remove the seven holding clips
from the cover by using a flat-
tipped screwdriver. Then pull the
bulkhead cover away.
6. 7. 8.
CONTINUED
Cooling System
Maintenance
255
BOLT
TAB
BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the coolant tube from the
radiator.
Put the end of the coolant tube
lower than the coolant reserve
tank and drain the coolant into an
appropriate container.
Put the reserve tank back in place,
making sure its bottom tab is in
the holder. Reinstall and tighten
the mounting bolt securely.
Reinstall the cover. Lock the
holding clips by pushing on the
center of the clip. Reinstall the bolt
in the battery hold-down.
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainplugatthe
bottom of the radiator.
Put the cover back in place and
tighten the bolts securely.
Reinstall the 16 holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on its
center.
Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
Put the coolant tube back in the
clips and reinstall the coolant tube
to the radiator securely.
12.
13.
9.
10.
11.
14.
15.
16.
Cooling System
Maintenance
256
FILLER NECK
Fill up to here
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the radiator fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
the engine.
Check the level in the radiator,
add coolant if needed.
The cooling system capacity is:
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
With automatic transmission:
With manual transmission:
Maintenance
Cooling System
257
RESERVE TANK
1.43 US gal (5.4 )
1.45 US gal (5.5
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the windshield washer fluid
level as follows:
Open the driver’s door.
Look at the side of the reservoir
tank located between the door and
the front dashboard.
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel. This reservoir supplies both
the windshield and rear window
washers.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
).
The windshield washer reservoir is
located in the back of the engine
compartment on the left side.
If the fluid level is below the lower
level mark, locate the reservoir
cap in the engine compartment.
Remove the cap and fill the
reservoir with windshield washer
fluid.
Reinstall the cap.
1.
2.
69
3.
4.
Canadian models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
258
LOWER LEVEL MARK
Fill up to here
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
259
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’s
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windshield washer
pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission as shown.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the filler hole
to bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
Automatic Transmission
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
260
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole.
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
6. 5-speed Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
261
WASHER FILLER BOLT
Correct level
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
Only use Honda Dual Pump Fluid.
Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF).
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Check the fluid level with the rear
differential at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
differential fluid filler bolt and
washer and carefully feel inside the
bolt hole with your finger. The fluid
level should be up to the edge of the
bolt hole. If it is not, slowly add
Honda Dual Pump Fluid until it
starts to run out of the hole.
Rear Differential Fluid
Maintenance
4WD models only
262
Correct
level
FILLER BOLT WASHER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Check the fluid level in the reser-
voirs monthly. There are up to two
reservoirs, depending on the model.
They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommenda-
tion in the maintenance schedule.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Brake System
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
263
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
Power SteeringClutch System
Maintenance
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering
264
MAX
MIN
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Loosen the five bolts with a
Phillips-head screwdriver or a
wrench, then lift up the air cleaner
housing cover.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Replacement
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
265
BOLTS
BOLTS
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, and tighten the five bolts.
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
4.
5.
Air Cleaner Element, Hood Latch
Maintenance
Hood Latch
266
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Clean off any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Use a wrench to remove the bolt
holding the ignition coil. Pull the
ignition coil up slightly.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Remove the ignition coil.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
Put the new spark plug into the
socket, then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
Remove the four nuts with a
wrench, then remove the coil
cover.
The spark plugs in your vehicle are a
special iridium-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
1.
6.
7.
5.2.
4.
3.
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
Replacement
267
NUTS NUTS
BOLT
IGNITION COIL
CONNECTOR
LOCK TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Connect the wire connector to the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Push the ignition coil down all the
way. Install the bolt.
Repeat this procedure for the
other three spark plugs.
Reinstall the coil cover, and
tighten the four nuts.
Install the ignition coil into the
hole.
NGK:
DENSO:
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
Specifications:
268
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
SKJ20DR-M11
IZFR6K-11Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
CONTINUED
Battery
Maintenance
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
269
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the vehicle’s
electrical system.
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
). You will then have to set the
clock and enter your station presets.
178
Battery
Maintenance
270
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
vehicle’s electronic controls. Detach
the battery cables bef ore connecting
the battery to a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Front:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Rear:
Raise the wiper arm off the hatch
glass and hold it.1.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Wiper Blades
271
FRONT
WIPER ARMS
REAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
If you are changing the rear wiper
blade, go to step 6.
4.3.2.
Maintenance
Wiper Blades
272
LOCK TAB
BLADE REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield or the hatch glass.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s air conditioning is a
sealed system. Any major mainte-
nance, such as recharging, should be
done by a qualified mechanic. You
can do a couple of things to make
sure the air conditioning works
efficiently.
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
343
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
274
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
The dust and pollen filter is located
behind the glove box.
Remove the dust and pollen filter
cover by pushing in on the lock tab,
then pulling the cover toward you.
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
andcoolingsystem.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system becomes
less than usual.
Open the glove box. Remove the
hooks on the side panels by
pushingontheendofeachhook
fromtheinsideoftheglovebox.
Pivot the glove box out of the way.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
Replacement
275
HOOKS COVER
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the first filter by pulling it
straight out of the air conditioning
unit. Remove the second filter by
sliding it to the left, then pulling it
out.
Remove the old filter from the
filter case.
Install the new filter in the case.
Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’
arrows on the filter and the filter
case face the same direction.
Install the dust and pollen filters
into the air conditioning unit.
Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’
arrows on the filter point
downward.
Reinstall the dust and pollen filter
cover.
Pivot the glove box up into
position. Reinstall the hooks into
thesidepaneloftheglovebox.
Close the glove box.
If you are not sure how to replace
the dust and pollen filters, have them
replaced by your Honda dealer.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
276
CASE
FILTER
DUST AND POLLEN FILTERS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the drive belt.
Examine the edges of the belt for
cracks or fraying.
An auto-tensioner adjusts the tension
of the drive belt. The pointer on the
auto-tensioner should be in the
proper range. It should be checked
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
If the pointer is out of this range or
you see signs of wear, have the drive
belt replaced by your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
Drive Belt
Maintenance
277
Proper range
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated. The
following pages give more detailed
informationonhowandwhento
check air pressure, how to inspect
your tires for damage and wear, and
what to do when your tires need to
be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,aremore
prone to damage from road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the
vehicle before checking the tire
pressure, the tires can still be
considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .279
Inflation
Tires
Maintenance
278
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers)],
you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to
40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher
than the cold reading. This is normal.
Do not let air out to match the
specified cold pressure. The tire will
be underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds.
Honda strongly recommends that
you not drive faster than posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you decide it is safe to drive at high
speeds, be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressuresasshownbelow.Ifyoudo
not adjust the tire pressure, exces-
sive heat can build up and cause
sudden tire failure.
When you return to normal speed
driving, be sure to readjust the tire
pressure for normal driving. You
should wait until the tires are cold
before adjusting the tire pressure.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold air pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information
about your tires, see page .343
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Speed over 100
mph (160 km/h)
Front/Rear:
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
Tire Pressure Adjustment for High
Speed Driving
Maintenance
279
P205/70R15 95S
P205/70R15 95S
26 psi (180 kPa ,
1.8 kgf/cm
)
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Excessive tread wear.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord. Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-
tors molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
Inspection Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
280
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your vehicle’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
(Only on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels)
Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
281
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s han-
dling.
The tires that came with your
vehicle were selected to match the
performance capabilities of the
vehicle while providing the best
combination of handling, ride
comfort,andlonglife.Youshould
replace them with radial tires of the
same size, load range, speed rating,
and maximum cold tire pressure
rating (as shown on the tire’s
sidewall). Mixing radial and bias-ply
tires on your vehicle can reduce its
braking ability, traction, and steering
accuracy.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle. Re-
placement wheels are available at
your Honda dealer.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
282
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋ If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your vehicle’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommenda-
tions.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
344
CONTINUED
Snow Tires
Wheels and Tires Winter Driving
Tires
Maintenance
283
15 x 6JJ
P205/70R15 95S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Because your Honda has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices on the
front tires. Use traction devices only
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
youhearthemcomingincontact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
284
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the operation of your vehicle’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
vehicle’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
285
FRONT PARKING LIGHT
HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER LIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the following:
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount brake light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
343
Lights
Maintenance
286
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT STOP/TAILLIGHTS
SIDE MARKER
LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BACK-UP LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs, one on each side. When
replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
base and protect the glass from
contactwithyourskinorhard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by a Honda technician
or other qualified mechanic.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming
Maintenance
Lights
287
WEATHER SEAL
CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE
BULB
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Open the hood. The front side
marker/turn signal light is next to
the headlight bulb.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket. Push the new
bulb straight into the socket until
it bottoms.
4.
5.
6.
7. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Front Side Marker/
Turn Signal Light Bulb
288
BULB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a wrench to loosen the bolt on
the battery hold-down. Remove
the seven holding clips from the
cover by using a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Then pull the
radiator support cover away.
To access the parking light bulb:
Open the hood. The front parking
light is next to the headlight bulb.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Reinstall the radiator support
cover. Lock the holding clips by
pushing on the center of each clip.
Tighten the bolt on the battery
hold-down.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket. Push the new
bulb straight into the socket until
it bottoms.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Front Parking Light
Bulb
289
BOLT
BULB
HOLDING
CLIP
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover. Remove the
covers by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the taillight assembly
mounting screw under each cover.
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, back-
up light, turn signal, or side
marker.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the taillight assembly out of
the rear pillar.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
290
BULBS
SCREW
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Align the clips on the taillight
assembly with the holes in the
body, then push the taillight
assembly into place. Tighten the
two mounting screws securely and
reinstall the covers.
Place a cloth and insert a small
flat-tipped screwdriver between
the right edge of the lens and the
housing. The lens will come down.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Put the lens back into the light
assembly, left side first. Push on
the right edge until it snaps into
place.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket. Push the new
bulb straight into the socket until
it bottoms.
1.
2.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.
4.
Maintenance
Lights
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
291
BULB
LENS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Put the cover back onto the light
assembly. Push it on until it locks
in place.
Open the tailgate. Remove the
light assembly cover by pushing in
on the tabs on both sides and
pulling the cover off.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket. Push the new
bulb straight into the socket until
it bottoms.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
292
COVER BULB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Although the ceiling light, cargo area
light and spotlights come apart the
same way, they do not use the same
type of bulbs.
Ceiling light:
Pry on the rear edge of the lens
near both sides.
Spotlights:
Pryonthefrontedgeinfrontof
both spotlights.
Cargo area light:
Pryonthefrontedgetothelens
near both sides.
1.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Interior Light Bulbs
293
CEILING LIGHT SPOTLIGHTS
BULB
LENS
BULBS
LENS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
3.
2.
Lights
Maintenance
294
CARGO AREA LIGHT
BULB
LENS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Nonporous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Reverse
(5-speed manual) or Park
(automatic).
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your vehicle for 12
months or longer, have your Honda
dealer perform the inspections called
for in the 24 months maintenance
schedule (Normal Conditions) as
soon as you take it out of storage
(see page ). The replacements
called for in the maintenance
schedule are not needed unless the
vehicle has actually reached that
time or mileage.
249
238
Maintenance
Storing Your Vehicle
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
296
Main Menu
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you hints
on how to clean your vehicle and
preserve its appearance: the paint,
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also
included are several things you can
do to help prevent corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 298
.....................................Washing . 298
.......................................Waxing . 299
....................Aluminum Wheels . 299
..........................Paint Touch-up . 300
..................................Interior Care . 301
...................................Carpeting . 301
.................................Floor Mats . 301
.........................................Fabric . 302
...........................................Vinyl . 302
.......................................Leather . 302
...................................Seat Belts . 302
....................................Windows . 303
..........................Air Fresheners . 303
....................Corrosion Protection . 304
.................................Body Repairs . 305
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
297
Main Menu
Frequent washing helps preserve
your vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and grit
can scratch the paint, while tree sap
and bird droppings can permanently
ruin the finish.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area,
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is
parked in the sun, move it into the
shade and let the exterior cool down
before you start.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with
cool water to remove loose dirt.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Wash the vehicle using the water
and detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the vehicle does not need waxing.
300
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
298
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
manual antenna on the f ront f ender. If
you use a ‘‘drive-through’’ vehicle
wash, make sure you remove the
antenna f irst by unscrewing it by hand.
This prevents the antenna f rom being
damaged by the brushes.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Always wash and dry the whole
vehiclebeforewaxingit.Youshould
wax your vehicle, including the metal
trim, whenever water sits on the
surface in large patches. It should
formintobeadsordropletsafter
waxing.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not need waxing.
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
On some models
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Waxing Aluminum Wheels
299
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your vehicle frequently for
chips or scratches in the paint.
Repair them right away to prevent
corrosion of the metal underneath.
Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Paint Touch-up
300
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
If you replace it, use a genuine
Honda floor mat that is designed to
be used with the floor mat anchor in
your vehicle.
If you remove the floor mat, make
sure to re-anchor it when you put it
back in your vehicle.
The Honda driver’s floor mat that
came with your vehicle was designed
to be hooked over the floor mat
anchor. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
Carpeting Floor Mats
Interior Care
Appearance Care
301
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp,softcloth.Wipedownand
buff as described above.
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethevehicle.
On EX-L model in Canada
Fabric Vinyl
Leather
Seat Belts
Interior Care
Appearance Care
302
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your
vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
Some liquid air fresheners contain
chemicals that may cause parts of
the interior trim and fabric to crack
or discolor.
Ifyouusealiquidairfreshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Interior Care
Appearance Care
Windows Air Fresheners
303
The rear window def ogger wires are
bonded to the inside of the glass.
Wiping vigorously up-and-down can
dislodge and break the def ogger wires.
When cleaning the rear window, use
gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your vehicle. This
is especially important in areas
that use road salt in winter. It is
also a good idea in humid climates
and areas subject to salt air.
Vehicles equipped with ABS have
a sensor and wiring at each wheel.
Be careful not to damage them.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your vehicle from
corroding by performing some
simple periodic maintenance:
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your vehicle:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
vehicle stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the vehicle.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
periodically.
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
304
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Honda parts used in
the repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investi-
gate this before any repairs have
begun.
Take your vehicle to your authorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body repairs can affect your vehicle’s
resistance to corrosion. If your
vehicle needs repairs after a collision,
pay close attention to the parts used
in the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Honda replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Honda body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
305
Main Menu
Table of Contents
306
Main Menu
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 308
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 318
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very
.................................Slowly . 318
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 319
................................Jump Starting . 320
............If Your Engine Overheats . 323
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 325
..........Charging System Indicator . 326
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 327
.......................Readiness Codes . 328
...............Brake System Indicator . 329
..................Closing the Moonroof . 330
..............................................Fuses . 331
..........Checking and Replacing . 332
......................Emergency Towing . 337
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
307
Main Menu
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park (automatic) or Reverse
(manual). Apply the parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Open the tailgate.1.
2.
3.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
308
JACK SPARE TIRE
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
To keep the tailgate door open,
use the stop from the tool kit. Put
the stop on the support strut as
shown.
The tool and jack are behind a
cover in the cargo area on the
passenger’s side. Remove the
cover by turning the handle
counterclockwise, then pulling out
the cover.
6.5.4.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
309
STOP
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the spare tire cover. Do
not forcibly pull off the cover or
you may damage it.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
soft vinyl spare tire cover. The
following shows you how to
remove the cover.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
hard plastic spare tire cover. See
page for how to remove the
cover.
Zip open the cover. Pull out the cover’s two lower flaps.
Don’t pull the top of the cover, or
you will tear it.
Remove the cover.
Pull the upper flaps out by
gradually working your hands up
the sides of the cover.
7.
8. 9.
11.
10.
311
OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.and
Canada
On EX-L model in Canada
OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.and
Canada
Soft vinyl spare tire cover
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
310
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unzip the flap around the lower
edge of the cover.
Pull off the center spacer. Using
the wheel wrench, loosen the
three wheel nuts and remove them.
Remove the spare tire from the
holder.
Pull out the bottom of the cover,
then gradually pull it off.
12. 14.13.
CONTINUED
On EX-L model in Canada
Hard plastic spare tire cover
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
311
CENTER SPACER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
Locate the jacking point nearest
thetireyouneedtochange.Itis
pointed to by an arrow molded into
the underside of the body. Place
the jack under the jacking point.
Turn the end bracket clockwise
until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point. Make sure the
center of the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
15. 16. 17.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
312
WHEEL NUT
JACKING POINT WHEEL WRENCH
EXTENSION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
18. 19. 20.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
313
BRAKE HUB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the flat tire on the spare tire
holder. Put the wheel nuts on
finger-tight, then tighten them
with the wheel wrench. Put the
center spacer in the center of the
wheel.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Install the cover on the side
of the cargo area.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
23.
21. 22.
24.
25.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
314
CENTER SPACER
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Step back to check the alignment
of the logo. If needed, pivot the
cover until the logo is straight.
Holdthecoveratthe10o’clock
and 2 o’clock positions, then place
the top of it over the spare tire.
Store the tool kit in the storage bin
under the cargo area floor.
Close the tailgate.
Install the spare tire cover.
26.
27.
28.
29. 30.
OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.and
Canada
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Soft vinyl spare tire cover
315
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Make sure the cover is at room
temperature bef ore you install it. If it’s
too cold, it won’t f it easily over the tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Starting at the top of the tire,
position the outside seam of the
cover slightly over the outside
edge of the tire. Pull the cover on,
a little at a time, and alternate side
to side along the tire until you
reach the bottom.
If needed, readjust the cover to
smooth out any wrinkles.
Pull the bottom of the cover over
the tire.
Zip the cover closed.31. 32.
33.
34.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
316
OUTSIDE SEAM
SPARE TIRE BRACKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the top of the cover over the
spare tire, then gradually push the
bottom of the cover over the
bottom of the tire.
Make sure the cover is horizontal.
If needed, pivot the cover until the
cover is horizontal.
Zip the cover closed.35. 36. 37.
On EX-L model in Canada
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Hard plastic spare tire cover
317
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things: Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is proba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
320
337
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
318
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Your vehicle has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
269
320
200
331
337
85
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
319
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery has run
down,youmaybeabletostartthe
engine by using a booster battery.
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
To jump start your vehicle, follow
these directions closely:
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
You cannot start a Honda with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
1.
2.
269
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
320
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
−
CONTINUED
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Remove the power steering
resevoir from the bracket. Pull it
away from the grounding strap.
3. 4. 5.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
321
BRACKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
the jumper cable connections to
make sure they have good metal-
to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.6.
7.
8.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
322
BOOSTER BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point then continue driving.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
Itmaygohigherifyouaredrivingup
a long steep hill on a very hot day. If
it climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling
system and all other accessories.
Turn on the hazard warning
indicators.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
Your vehicle can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
323
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
10.
9.
8.
7.
6.
11.
12.
337
189
337
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
324
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood and check the oil
level (see page ). Although oil
levelandoilpressurearenot
directly connected, an engine that
is very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
1.
2.
4.
3.
188
247
337
Emergency
Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
325
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, heater, A/C, rear
defogger, cruise control, etc. Try not
to use other electrically-operated
controls such as the power windows.
Keep the engine running and take
extra care not to stall it. Starting the
engine will discharge the battery
rapidly.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
326
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your vehicle to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes one driving trip.
If the indicator remains on past one
driving trip, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your vehicle if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
327
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your vehicle
for a state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. To check if
they are set, turn the ignition ON (II),
but do not start the engine. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. Refer to State
Emissions Testing for more
information.(See page .)351
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Readiness Codes
328
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the vehicle’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the vehicle to
your dealer and have the brake
system inspected for leaks or worn
brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the
vehicle begins to slow down, and you
will have to press harder on the
pedal. The distance needed to stop
will be much longer.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
The Brake System Indicator
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
this indicator, have the vehicle
inspected by your Honda dealer
immediately.
263
337
On models equipped with ABS
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
329
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
round plug.
To remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner, turn the
plug by using a screwdriver or
coin, then pry it out. Make sure to
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceilling as
shown in the illustration.
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit under the cargo area
floor.
1.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
331
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
330
TAB NOTCH
ROUND PLUG
SOCKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All the electrical circuits in your
vehicle have fuses to protect them
from a short circuit or overload.
These fuses are located in two fuse
boxes.
The under-hood fuse box is located
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
The interior fuse box is underneath
the steering column. To remove the
fuse box lid, pull it toward you and
take the lid out of its hinges.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
331
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
INTERIOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
3.
1.
2.
335 336
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
332
FUSE
BLOWN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
5.4.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
333
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
6.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Fuses
334
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
No.
No.
CONTINUED
Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
15 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
Ignition Coil
Daytime running lights
ACG
Not Used
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Power Window Relay
Moonroof
Accessory, Radio
Rear Wiper
Meter
Not Used
Daytime running lights
SRS
Remote Control Mirrors
LAF Heater
Heated Seat
Fuel Pump
Turn Signal Lights
Front Wiper
Not Used
Front Right Power Window
Front Left Power Window
Rear Left Power Window
Rear Right Power Window
: On Canadian models
Rear Accessory Power Socket
Front Accessory Power Socket
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
335
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
30 A
100 A
50 A
Condenser Fan
Small Light
Interior Light
Cooling Fan
Hazard
FI ECU
Horn, Stop
Not Used
Back Up
ABS Motor
Rear Defroster
Heater Motor
Power Window
Option
Left Headlight
Door Lock
Right Headlight
ABS F/S
Battery
Ignition 1
Spare Fuses
21 25
7.5A 30A
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Fuses
336
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or,
ifyoubelongtoone,anorganization
that provides roadside assistance.
Never tow your vehicle behind
another vehicle with just a rope or
chain. It is very dangerous.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
cables lift that end of the vehicle off
the ground. Your vehicle’s
suspension and body can be
seriously damaged.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Any other
method of towing will damage the
drive system. When you contact the
towing agency, inform them that a
flat-bed is required.
Refer to
on page
for non-emergency towing
information.
224
Wheel Lift Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
Flat-bed Equipment
Never tow your vehicle with
wheel lift equipment.
This method of
towing your CR-V is unacceptable.
This is the only way to
transport your vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
337
Towing a 4WD CR-V with only two
tires on the ground will damage parts
of the 4WD system. It should be
transported on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
338
Main Menu
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 340
................................Specifications . 342
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 344
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 344
.................................Treadwear . 344
......................................Traction . 344
.............................Temperature . 345
...........................Tire Information . 346
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 347
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 348
.......................Emissions Controls . 349
.....................The Clean Air Act . 349
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 349
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 349
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 349
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 350
....................PGM-FI System . 350
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 350
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 350
....................Replacement Parts . 350
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 351
..............State Emissions Testing . 352
Technical Information
Technical Information
339
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
placetofindtheVINisonaplate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
Youcanseeitbylookingthrough
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label at-
tached to the driver’s doorjamb, and
is stamped on the engine com-
partment bulkhead. The VIN is also
provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
340
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block.
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
341
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
342
Dimensions
Weights
Engine
Capacities
178.6 in (4,537 mm)
70.2 in (1,782 mm)
66.2 in (1,682 mm)
103.1 in (2,620 mm)
60.4 in (1,533 mm)
60.6 in (1,538 mm)
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.6 : 1
15.3 US gal (58
)
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
1.43 US gal (5.4
)
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
1.45 US gal (5.5 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
3.1 US qt (2.9 )
7.6 US qt (7.2 )
6.9 US qt (6.5
)
2.0 US qt (1.9
)
2.4 US qt (2.3 )
1.1 US qt (1.0 )
1.3 US qt (1.2 )
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Fuel tank
Engine oil
Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC
VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
2.2 US qt (2.1
)
Engine
coolant
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Manual
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
See spark plug maintenance
section page 269 .
Approx.
Front
Rear
Change
Without filter
Total
1:
2:
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
4WD
2WD
Total
4WD
2WD
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
4WD
2WD
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
1
2
2
Including filter
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Information
343
Air Conditioning
Battery
Tires
Alignment
Fuses
Lights
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.0 18.7 oz (480 530 g)
SP-10
12 V
12 V
60/55 W
21/5 W
36 AH/5 HR
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
3CP
8W
4CP
8W
5W
21 W
21/5 W
21 W
12 V 3 CP
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Capacity 12 V
See page 335 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
45 AH/20 HR
26 psi (180 kPa , 1.8 kgf/cm
)
26 psi (180 kPa , 1.8 kgf/cm
)
P205/70R15 95SSize
Pressure
Toe-in
Camber
Caster 1°45’
1°
0°
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0.0in(0mm)
See page 336 or the fuse box
cover.
Interior
Under-hood
Headlights
Front turn signal/side marker
lights
Parking lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Cargo area Light
Rear side marker lights
High-mount brake light
12 V
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Front
Rear
(H4/HB2)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
344
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
345
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Rim diameter in inches.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
look like the following example TIN.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
P
R
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
205
70
15
95
S
Technical Information
Tire Information
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
346
P205/70R15 95S
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
METHANOL
MTBE
ETHANOL
Oxygenated Fuels
Technical Information
347
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the re-
placement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
Driving in Foreign Countries
Technical Information
348
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a Positive
Crankcase Ventilation System. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The Positive Crank-
case Ventilation valve routes them
from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
238
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
349
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include three systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, and Three
Way Catalytic Converter. These
three systems work together to
control the engine’s combustion and
minimize the amount of HC, CO, and
NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The
exhaust emissions control systems
are separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems. The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
genuine Honda replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lowerqualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Engine Control Module (ECM)
or the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
2
2
Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
350
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Parkyourvehicleawayfromhigh
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma-
bles.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
351
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(approximately3
minutes).
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
352
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use
thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
353
Main Menu
Table of Contents
354
Main Menu
Customer Relations
................................Information . 356
....................Warranty Coverages . 357
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 358
.....................Authorized Manuals . 359
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
355
Main Menu
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
340
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Relations Information
356
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 250-4318
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
genuine Honda Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2003 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2003 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
357
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
Warranty and Customer Relations
358
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
３
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356
(credit card orders only)
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
359
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$70.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$10.00
FREE
Publication
Form Number
61S9A01
61S9A01EL
61S9A30
31S9A610
31S9AQ00
HON-R
Form Description
2002-03 Honda CR-V
Service Manual
2002-03 Honda CR-V
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2002-03 Honda CR-V
Body Repair Manual
2003 Honda CR-V
Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda CR-V
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
360
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 66, 326
............................Jump Starting . 320
..............................Maintenance . 269
............................Specifications . 343
..............................Before Driving . 183
....................................Belts,Seat .8,50
.........................Beverage Holders . 116
.................................Body Repairs . 305
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 212
.............Break-in, New Linings . 184
....................Bulb Replacement . 290
...........................................Fluid . 263
.........................................Parking . 82
.................System Indicator . 66, 329
........................Wear Indicators . 211
.............................Braking System . 211
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 184
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 77
........................Brights, Headlights . 76
.................................Built-in Table . 117
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 290
..............................Brake Lights . 290
......................Cargo Area Light . 293
..............................Ceiling Light . 293
................Front Parking Lights . 289
........Front Side Marker Lights . 288
.................................Headlights . 287
.........High-mount Brake Light . 292
...........................Interior Lights . 293
...................License Plate Light . 291
...Accessories and Modifications . 191
................................Accessories . 191
.Additional Safety Precautions . 192
............................Modifications . 192
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 87
............Accessory Power Sockets . 122
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 248
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 54
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 265
..............Air Conditioning System . 128
..............................Maintenance . 274
.........................................Usage . 128
.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 130
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 278
..................High Speed Driving . 279
.........................Normal Driving . 279
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 347
......................................Antifreeze . 251
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 68, 214
...................................Operation . 212
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 178
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 87
..........................Appearance Care . 297
................................Audio System . 137
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 52
.............Automatic Speed Control . 179
..............Automatic Transmission . 204
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 342
...............Checking Fluid Level . 260
.......................................Shifting . 205
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 204
................Shift Lever Positions . 205
....................Shift Lock Release . 209
Index
A
B
I
Main Menu
＊
Bulb Replacement
.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 290
............................Specifications . 343
...................................Spotlights . 293
....................Turn Signal Lights . 288
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 287
............................Capacities Chart . 342
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60
..........................Cargo Area Light . 125
.................................Cargo Hooks . 196
.............................Carrying Cargo . 193
Cassette Player
............................................Care . 168
...........................Operation . 151, 164
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
..........................CD Changer . 149, 169
.......................................CD Player . 146
...............................Center Pocket . 119
..................................Center Table . 115
........................Certification Label . 340
............................................Chains . 284
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 308
............Changing Engine Coolant . 253
.................................Changing Oil . 249
........................................How to . 249
......................................When to . 238
...Charging System Indicator . 66, 326
............Checklist, Before Driving . 199
.....................................Child Safety . 24
.......................................Child Seats . 29
......LATCH Anchorage System . 47
...........................Lower Anchors . 47
............Tether Anchorage Point . 46
..................Childproof Door Locks . 93
....................Cleaner Element, Air . 265
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 299
...................................Carpeting . 301
......................................Exterior . 298
.........................................Fabric . 302
.......................................Interior . 301
.......................................Leather . 302
...................................Seat Belts . 302
...........................................Vinyl . 302
....................................Windows . 303
.................Clock, Setting the . 144, 162
...................................Clutch Fluid . 264
........................CO in the Exhaust . 349
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 201
...............Consumer Information . 356
.............Controls, Instruments and . 63
Coolant
........................................Adding . 251
....................................Checking . 189
.........................Proper Solution . 251
...................................Replacing . 253
...................Temperature Gauge . 74
....................Corrosion Protection . 304
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 349
............Cruise Control Operation . 179
..........Customer Relations Office . 356
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
.......................................Dashboard . 64
................Daytime Running Lights . 77
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 358
........................Defog and Defrost . 134
................Defogger, Rear Window . 81
..............Defrosting the Windows . 134
.......................Detachable Anchor . 108
....................................Dimensions . 342
...............Dimming the Headlights . 76
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 260
..................................Engine Oil . 188
..........................Directional Signals . 77
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 211
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 250
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 88
......................Power Door Locks . 88
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 344
Downshifting, 5-speed Manual
.............................Transmission . 202
.......................................Drive Belt . 277
...........................................Driving . 197
....................................Economy . 190
.........................In Bad Weather . 215
................In Foreign Countries . 347
........................Driving Guidelines . 198
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 275
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 302
...................................Fan, Interior . 128
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 127
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 185
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 265
.........................Dust and Pollen . 275
...............................................Oil . 249
5-speed Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 261
................................Shifting the . 202
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 81
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 308
..............................Economy, Fuel . 190
............Emergencies on the Road . 307
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 320
...........Brake System Indicator . 329
................Changing a Flat Tire . 308
.....Charging System Indicator . 326
..................Checking the Fuses . 332
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 325
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 327
...Manually Closing Moonroof . 330
..................Overheated Engine . 323
...........................Emergency Brake . 82
......................Emergency Flashers . 81
......................Emergency Towing . 337
.......................Emissions Controls . 349
.............Emissions Testing, State . 352
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 74
...................................Drive Belt . 277
......Engine Speed Limiter . 203, 208
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 66, 327
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 325
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 247
...............................Overheating . 323
............................Specifications . 342
.......................................Starting . 200
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 347
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 349
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 60
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 21
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 298
Index
E
F
III
Main Menu
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 287
.....................................Hatch Glass . 94
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 81
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 287
............Daytime Running Lights . 77
..................High Beam Indicator . 69
........................Reminder Beeper . 76
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 287
...................................Turning on . 76
..............................Head Restraints . 99
.....................Heating and Cooling . 128
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 201
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 76
..............High-mount Brake Light . 292
....................................Hood Latch . 266
.......................Hood, Opening the . 186
..............................................Horn .3,75
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 264
.................................Hydroplaning . 216
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 260
..........................................Brake . 263
.........................................Clutch . 264
..............Manual Transmission . 261
..........................Power Steering . 264
.......................Rear Differential . 262
..................Windshield Washer . 258
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 161
.........................Folding Rear Seat . 104
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 348
..........................Four-way Flashers . 81
............................Front Airbags . 10, 54
.................................................Fuel . 184
......................Fill Door and Cap . 185
...........................................Gauge . 74
................Octane Requirement . 184
...............................Oxygenated . 347
........................Reserve Indicator . 69
........................Tank, Filling the . 185
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 331
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190
..........................................Gasohol . 347
.........................................Gasoline . 184
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 69
...........................................Gauge . 74
................Octane Requirement . 184
........................Tank, Filling the . 185
................Gas Station Procedures . 185
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 74
...............................................Fuel . 74
...............................Speedometer . 72
.................................Tachometer . 72
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 204
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 203
..............................Glass Cleaning . 303
........................................Glove Box . 96
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 340
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 84
...........................................Switch . 86
............Timing Control System . 350
........................Immobilizer System . 85
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 65
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 84
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 312
.......................................Jack, Tire . 309
................................Jump Starting . 320
...............................Infant Restraint . 34
......................................Infant Seats . 34
......LATCH Anchorage System . 47
...........................Lower Anchors . 47
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 278
.................High Speed Driving . 279
.........................Normal Driving . 279
.................................Inside Mirror . 114
.............................Inspection, Tire . 280
............................Instrument Panel . 65
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 77
...........................Interior Cleaning . 301
...............................Interior Lights . 124
........................................Introduction . i
.......................Label, Certification . 340
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 77
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 50
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 287
.......................................Indicator . 65
.........................................Parking . 76
..................................Turn Signal . 77
.....................................Load Limit . 194
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 87
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 87
............................Fuel Fill Door . 185
....................................Glove Box . 96
.................................Power Door . 88
........................................Tailgate . 93
........................Low Coolant Level . 189
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 69
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 325
................................Lower Anchors . 47
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 342
.........................................Luggage . 193
..................................Maintenance . 233
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 245
.................................Record . 243-244
......................Required Indicator . 70
..........................................Safety . 234
.............................Schedule . 238-242
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 66, 327
...................Manual Transmission . 202
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 261
.........................Meters, Gauges . 65, 72
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 347
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 114
.......................................Moonroof . 113
......................Closing Manually . 330
...................................Operation . 113
Index
LM
K
J
V
Main Menu
...................Neutral Gear Position . 206
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 184
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 203
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 340
...................Radiator Overheating . 323
Radio/Cassette/CD Sound
........................................System . 137
...........................Readiness Codes . 328
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 262
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 290
........................Rear Seat, Folding . 104
..........................Rear View Mirror . 114
.................Rear Window Defogger . 81
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 80
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 97
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 203
.............................Reminder Lights . 65
.......................Remote Transmitter . 89
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 184
.........................................Odometer . 73
...............................Odometer, Trip . 73
..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 226
Oil
........................Change, How to . 249
......................Change, When to . 238
......................Checking Engine . 188
..............Pressure Indicator . 66, 325
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 248
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 87
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 349
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 348
............................Outside Mirrors . 114
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 73
.....................................Over Drive . 207
....................Overheating, Engine . 323
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 245
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 347
..............................Paint Touch-up . 300
..............Panel Brightness Control . 77
........................Park Gear Position . 205
...........................................Parking . 210
.................................Parking Brake . 82
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 66, 329
.................................Parking Lights . 76
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 210
.............................PGM-FI System . 350
..................Polishing and Waxing . 299
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 21
............................Protecting Adults . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 22
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21
........................Protecting Children . 24
.......................Protecting Infants . 34
.......Protecting Larger Children . 42
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 47
Index
N
O
RP
VI
Main Menu
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 265
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 275
..........................Engine Coolant . 253
................Engine Oil and Filter . 249
..........................................Fuses . 331
................................Light Bulbs . 287
....................................Schedule . 238
................................Spark Plugs . 267
...........................................Tires . 282
.............................Wiper Blades . 271
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 53
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 189, 251
...............................Restraint, Child . 24
..................Reverse Gear Position . 206
...........................Reverse Lockout . 209
................................Rotation, Tire . 281
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 50
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 358
...........Safety Checklist, Pre-Drive . 12
.................................Safety Features . 7
.........................................Airbags . 10
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 11
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 61
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 50
...............Additional Information . 50
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 52
.....................................Cleaning . 302
...................Detachable Anchor . 108
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 50
................................Maintenance . 53
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 50, 67
................................Replacement . 53
...................System Components . 50
...............Use During Pregnancy . 21
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17
..................................Seat Heaters . 109
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 97
...............................Serial Number . 340
...........................Service Intervals . 238
...........................Service Manual . 359
.........Service Station Procedures . 185
..................Setting the Clock . 144, 162
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 204
........................Shift Lock Release . 209
..............................Side Airbags . 10, 56
....................Cutoff Indicator . 58, 67
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 288
...............................Signaling Turns . 77
.....................................Snow Tires . 283
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 298
................................Sound System . 137
......................................Spare Tire . 308
................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 267
....................Specifications Charts . 342
................................Speed Control . 179
...................................Speedometer . 72
.......................................Spotlights . 124
Index
S
VII
Main Menu
..........SRS, Additional Information . 54
...Additional Safety Precautions . 59
.............................Airbag Service . 59
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 58
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 57
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 54
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56
........................SRS Components . 54
.............................SRS Indicator . 57, 67
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 87
..............State Emissions Testing . 350
.......................Starting the Engine . 200
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 201
................With a Dead Battery . 320
........Steam Coming from Engine . 323
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 83
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 87
...................Stereo Sound System . 137
...................................Storage Box . 119
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 295
........................Sunglasses Holder . 121
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 10, 54
......................................Servicing . 59
.........................SRS Indicator . 57, 67
...................System Components . 54
..................................Synthetic Oil . 248
.....................................Tachometer . 72
Tailgate
.................................Hatch Glass . 94
............................Open Indicator . 70
.................................Opening the . 93
..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 290
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 307
...........................Tape Player . 151, 164
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 344
.....Emissions Control Systems . 349
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 347
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 351
.......................Temperature Gauge . 74
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46
............................Theft Protection . 178
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 351
..................Time, Setting the . 144, 162
....................................Tire Chains . 284
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 308
...........................Tire Information . 346
...............................................Tires . 278
..............................Air Pressure . 279
.........................Checking Wear . 280
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 344
......................................Inflation . 278
..................................Inspection . 280
..............................Maintenance . 280
...................................Replacing . 282
......................................Rotating . 281
...........................................Snow . 283
............................Specifications . 343
................................Tire Chains . 284
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 308
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 217
...............Behind a Motorhome . 224
................................Emergency . 337
Index
T
VIII
Main Menu
＊
＊
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 342
....Vehicle Identification Number . 340
.............................Vehicle Storage . 295
.....................................Ventilation . 131
.................................................VIN . 340
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 302
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 248
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 260
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 261
..................Fluid Selection . 260, 261
..............Identification Number . 341
.............Shifting the Automatic . 204
..................Shifting the Manual . 202
.....................................Treadwear . 344
.......................................Trip Meter . 73
....................................Turn Signals . 77
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 304
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 307
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 344
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 184
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 301
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 250
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 61
..................Warranty Coverages . 357
Washers, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 258
.....................................Operation . 79
.........................................Washing . 298
..................Waxing and Polishing . 299
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 83
............Alignment and Balance . 280
......................................Wrench . 311
Windows
.....................................Cleaning . 303
................Operating the Power . 110
...........................Rear, Defogger . 81
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 78
...................................Defroster . 134
.....................................Washers . 258
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 271
.....................................Operation . 78
....................................Worn Tires . 280
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 337
: U.S. and Canada only
Index
U
V
W
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
5-speed Manual Transmission
Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
15.3 US gal (58
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
Capacity (including differential): 26 psi (180 kPa , 1.8 kgf/cm
)
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Front/Rear:
2.0 US qt (1.9
)
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Capacity:
1.1 US qt (1.0
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
247
262
264
263
260
261
Main Menu
